Sei sulla pagina 1di 229

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers

V200R002C01

Configuration Guide - Voice


Issue

01

Date

2012-04-20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

About This Document

About This Document


Intended Audience
This document provides the basic concepts, configuration procedures, and configuration
examples in different application scenarios of the voice feature.
This document describes how to configure the voice feature.
This document is intended for:
l

Data configuration engineers

Commissioning engineers

Network monitoring engineers

System maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save


time.

NOTE

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement


important points of the main text.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

About This Document

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical


bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical


bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical


bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be
selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical


bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

&<1-n>

The parameter before the & sign can be repeated 1 to n times.

A line starting with the # sign is comments.

Interface Numbering Conventions


Interface numbers used in this manual are examples. In device configuration, use the existing
interface numbers on devices.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.

Changes in Issue 01 (2012-04-20)


Initial commercial release.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 SIPAG Configuration...................................................................................................................1
1.1 SIP AG Overview...............................................................................................................................................2
1.2 SIP AG Features Supported by the AR2200......................................................................................................2
1.3 Configuring the AR2200 to Work in SIP AG Mode..........................................................................................6
1.4 Configuring a SIP AG Interface.........................................................................................................................7
1.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.........................................................................................................7
1.4.2 Configuring Media and Signaling IP Address Pools.................................................................................8
1.4.3 Setting Parameters on the SIP AG Interface.............................................................................................8
1.4.4 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................15
1.5 (Optional) Setting Parameters for Voice Interfaces..........................................................................................16
1.5.1 Setting Parameters for an FXS Interface.................................................................................................16
1.5.2 Setting parameters for a BRA Interface...................................................................................................18
1.5.3 Setting Parameters for a PRA Interface...................................................................................................19
1.6 (Optional) Setting Voice Parameters on a SIP AG...........................................................................................21
1.6.1 Setting System Parameters......................................................................................................................21
1.6.2 Setting SIP Stack Parameters..................................................................................................................30
1.6.3 Setting DSP Parameters...........................................................................................................................32
1.7 Configuring a SIPAG User...............................................................................................................................43
1.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................44
1.7.2 Setting Parameters for a SIP AG User.....................................................................................................44
1.7.3 Configuring a SIP AG User Group..........................................................................................................46
1.7.4 (Optional) Configuring Functions or Services in a SIP Service Data Profile.........................................47
1.7.5 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................49
1.8 (Optional) Configuring the BEST Service.......................................................................................................50
1.9 Resetting a SIP AG...........................................................................................................................................52
1.10 Maintaining a SIP AG....................................................................................................................................53
1.10.1 Clearing SIP AG Statistics....................................................................................................................53
1.11 Configuration Examples.................................................................................................................................53
1.11.1 Example for Configuring a SIP AG......................................................................................................53
1.11.2 Using a PRA Trunk to Connect the SIP AG to a PBX..........................................................................57
1.11.3 Example for Configuring the BEST Service.........................................................................................61

2 PBX Configuration......................................................................................................................66
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Contents

2.1 PBX Overview..................................................................................................................................................68


2.2 PBX Features Supported by the AR2200.........................................................................................................69
2.3 PBX Configuration Procedures........................................................................................................................74
2.4 (Optional) Setting Parameters for Voice Interfaces..........................................................................................78
2.4.1 Setting Parameters for an FXS Interface.................................................................................................78
2.4.2 Setting Parameters for an FXO Interface.................................................................................................80
2.4.3 Setting parameters for a BRA Interface...................................................................................................81
2.4.4 Setting Parameters for a PRA Interface...................................................................................................83
2.5 Setting PBX Parameters...................................................................................................................................84
2.5.1 Configuring the AR2200 to Work in PBX Mode....................................................................................84
2.5.2 Configuring Media and Signaling IP Address Pools...............................................................................85
2.5.3 (Optional) Setting System Parameters.....................................................................................................86
2.5.4 (Optional) Setting SIP Stack Parameters.................................................................................................95
2.5.5 (Optional) Setting DSP Parameters.........................................................................................................98
2.6 Configuring an Enterprise..............................................................................................................................108
2.7 Configuring a Call Prefix...............................................................................................................................110
2.8 Configuring a PBX User.................................................................................................................................112
2.9 (Optional) Configuring a SIP Server..............................................................................................................113
2.10 (Optional)Configuring SBC Proxy Function................................................................................................115
2.10.1 Configuring the SBC Proxy Function (Public IP Address for the SIP Server and Private IP Addresses
for SIPUEs).....................................................................................................................................................116
2.10.2 Configuring the SBC Proxy Function (Private IP Address for the SIP Server and Public IP Addresses
for SIP UEs)....................................................................................................................................................118
2.10.3 Configuring the SBC Proxy Function (Private IP Address for the SIP Server and Private IP Addresses
for SIP UEs)....................................................................................................................................................121
2.11 (Optional)Configuring a CDR Server...........................................................................................................124
2.12 Configuring a Trunk Group..........................................................................................................................126
2.12.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................126
2.12.2 Configuring a Trunk Group.................................................................................................................127
2.12.3 Binding Trunks in a Trunk Group.......................................................................................................139
2.12.4 Resetting a SIP Trunk Group...............................................................................................................141
2.12.5 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................142
2.13 Configuring a Call Route..............................................................................................................................142
2.14 (Optional)Configuring Individualized PBX Services...................................................................................144
2.14.1 Configuring the Abbreviated Dialing Service.....................................................................................144
2.14.2 Configuring the Call-out Restriction Service......................................................................................145
2.14.3 Configuring the Call Forwarding Service...........................................................................................147
2.14.4 Configuring the Number Barring Service...........................................................................................148
2.14.5 Configuring the DND Service.............................................................................................................149
2.14.6 Configuring the RAC Service..............................................................................................................151
2.14.7 Configuring the Remote Office Service..............................................................................................152
2.14.8 Configuring the Secretary Service.......................................................................................................153
2.14.9 Configuring the Wake-up Service.......................................................................................................154
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Contents

2.14.10 Configuring the RBT Service............................................................................................................155


2.14.11 Configuring the SCR Service............................................................................................................157
2.14.12 Configuring the SCA Service............................................................................................................158
2.15 (Optional) Configuring Group Services on the PBX....................................................................................159
2.15.1 Configuring the Call Interception Service...........................................................................................159
2.15.2 Configuring the Distinctive Ringing Service......................................................................................161
2.15.3 Configuring the Enterprise RBT Service.............................................................................................162
2.15.4 Configure the IVR Service..................................................................................................................164
2.15.5 Configuring the Number Change Service...........................................................................................170
2.15.6 Configuring the Pre-routing Number Change Service........................................................................171
2.15.7 Configuring the Post-routing Number Change Service.......................................................................173
2.15.8 Configuring the PBX Line Selection Service......................................................................................175
2.15.9 Configuring the Co-Group Pickup Service.........................................................................................176
2.15.10 Configuring Simultaneous Ringing...................................................................................................177
2.15.11 Configuring Sequential Ringing........................................................................................................179
2.15.12 Configuring the One Number Link You Service...............................................................................180
2.15.13 Configuring the Blacklist or Whitelist Function...............................................................................181
2.15.14 Configuring the DISA Service..........................................................................................................183
2.15.15 Configuring the Immediate Conference Service...............................................................................186
2.16 Configuration Examples...............................................................................................................................188
2.16.1 Example for Configuring Voice Services for a Small- or Medium-sized Enterprise..........................188
2.16.2 Example for Configuring the AR to Implement Communication for Different Enterprises...............193
2.16.3 Example for Using an H.323 Trunk Group in Peer Mode to Configure Calls Between the Headquarters
and Branch......................................................................................................................................................199
2.16.4 Example for Using an H.323 Trunk Group in Registration Mode to Configure Calls Between the
Headquarters and Branch................................................................................................................................208
2.16.5 Example for Using the SIP Trunk Group to Configure Calls Between the Headquarters and Branch
........................................................................................................................................................................213

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

SIPAG Configuration

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the concepts and configuration of SIPAG, and provides a configuration
example.
1.1 SIP AG Overview
This section describes the SIP AG in VoIP applications.
1.2 SIP AG Features Supported by the AR2200
This section describes SIP AG features supported by the AR2200.
1.3 Configuring the AR2200 to Work in SIP AG Mode
Before configuring SIP AG service features, configure the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode.
1.4 Configuring a SIP AG Interface
This section describes how to configure a SIP AG interface.
1.5 (Optional) Setting Parameters for Voice Interfaces
This section describes how to set parameters for voice interfaces.
1.6 (Optional) Setting Voice Parameters on a SIP AG
This section describes how to set voice parameters on a SIP AG.
1.7 Configuring a SIPAG User
This section describes how to configure a SIPAG user.
1.8 (Optional) Configuring the BEST Service
The branch exchange for survivable telephony (BEST) service enables SIP AGs in enterprise
branches to manage local calls when communication with the headquarters voice server fails.
1.9 Resetting a SIP AG
This section describes how to reset a SIP AG.
1.10 Maintaining a SIP AG
This section describes how to maintain a SIP AG.
1.11 Configuration Examples
This section provides a SIPAG configuration example.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

1.1 SIP AG Overview


This section describes the SIP AG in VoIP applications.

VoIP
On the Public Switched Telephone (PSTN), telephone lines are occupied exclusively. The fees
for toll calls are high.
To reduce data and voice fees and meet service requirements, voice over IP (VoIP) is used.
VoIP transmits voice services over the IP network. In VoIP, a voice gateway encapsulates voice
signals into frames and transmits them as IP packets. Currently, IP phone gateways implement
communication between the PSTN network and IP network. As PC-to-phone, phone-to-PC, and
phone-to-phone technologies have developed, the voice quality is improved greatly. VoIP can
meet commercial requirements.

Voice Gateway
The IP network is a packet switched network. The transmission costs on the IP network are lower
than those on the PSTN; therefore, VoIP will take place traditional voice phones gradually.
Replacing all phone networks with VoIP will take high costs. The step-by-step migration
solution is recommended.
In most enterprise voice solutions, phone networks of branches are reserved and the IP network
is used between branches.
In the step-by-step migration solution, a voice gateway is required to connect the two types of
networks. A router is often used as the voice gateway.

IMS
The IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (IMS) is an architectural framework for providing
IP multimedia services, including audio, video, text, and instant messages. It was designed by
the wireless standards body 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) in Release 5.

SIP
The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is a text-based signaling protocol. SIP messages are
classified into request and response messages. SIP can be used for creating, modifying, and
terminating two-party or multiparty sessions. SIP can be used for multimedia conferences,
remote education, and Internet calls.

SIPAG
A SIP access gateway (SIP AG) is a voice gateway that exchanges SIP signals with other devices
between the PSTN/ISDN and IP network. It can implement VoIP functions.

1.2 SIP AG Features Supported by the AR2200


This section describes SIP AG features supported by the AR2200.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Using a SIP AG as a Voice Gateway


As shown in Figure 1-1, a SIP AG functions as an IP voice gateway to implement
communication between the IP network and the PSTN or ISDN. The usage scenarios are as
follows:
l

A user connects to the SIP AG through the PSTN. The SIP AG converts analog signals into
digital signals and compresses and packetizes the digital signals so that the voice packets
can be transmitted on the IP network.

Voice packets are transmitted to the SIP AG through the IP network. The IP voice gateway
of the called party converts the voice packets into analog voice signals and transmits them
to the terminal of the called party through the PSTN.
NOTE

l The AR2200 series routers support the voice features only after a DSP module is installed.
l To provide voice services for POTS users, 4FXS1FXO board is required.
l To provide voice services for ISDN users, 2BST board is required.

Figure 1-1 SIP AG as a voice gateway

IMS/IP

SIPAG

POTS

Eth1/0/0

Modem

FAX

SIP AG call flow


The SIP AG call flow is as follows:
1.

A user picks up the phone and the SIP AG detects offhook signals.

2.

The DSP module of the SIP AG generates a dial tone.

3.

The user hears the dial tone played by the session application of the SIP AG and starts to
dial up.

4.

The session application of the SIP AG collects the number dialed by the user.

5.

The session application of the SIP AG matches the number with preconfigured called
number profiles.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

6.

When the voice gateway of the calling party successfully matches the number with a
preconfigured called number profile, the number is mapped to the voice gateway of the
called party.

7.

The SIP AG initiates a call over the IMS and establishes a logical channel for each call.
Then the channel is used to send and receive voice data.

8.

The IMS searches for the destination phone and initiates a call.

9.

After the called party picks up the phone, a call is set up. After the calling party or called
party hangs up the phone, the call is ended.

Voice Services Supported by the SIP AG


The SIP AG supports the basic voice service and developed services such as the three-party
service and call waiting service. Among these services, some voice services need to be
configured on the SIP AG.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Service Type

Introduction

Configure
d on the
SIP AG or
Not

Basic voice service

The basic voice service is the basic call connection


function, including intra-office calls, local calls,
national toll calls, international toll calls, and transit
calls.

Yes

Three-party service

The third-party service allows a calling party or called


party in a conversation to call a third party without
ending the current conversation. Then the calling party
or original called party can implement a three-party
conversation or talk to the other two parties.

Yes

Call waiting
service

When user A is talking with user B over the phone and


at this moment user C is calling user A, user A hears a
call waiting tone, indicating that there is a call waiting
for user A.

Yes

MWI service

The message waiting indicator (MWI) service allows a


user to read unread messages or leave messages. When
the called user is busy, the MWI is on, indicating that
there are leave messages.

Yes

Malicious call
identification
(MCID) service

The user that registers the MCID service with the carrier
can query the phone number of the attacker that initiates
malicious calls after performing relevant operations.

Yes

Call transfer
service

The call transfer service allows the called party to


transfer an incoming call to a third party by pressing the
hookflash so that the calling party establishes a
connection with a new called party.

Yes

Call conference
service

The call conference service allows more than three


parties to communicate together.

Yes

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Service Type

Introduction

Configure
d on the
SIP AG or
Not

Calling line
identification
presentation
(CLIP) service

The CLIP service displays the calling number in onhook


state or offhook state (for call waiting). The displayed
information includes the phone number, name, date, and
time.

No

Calling line
identification
restriction (CLIR)
service

The CLIR service displays the phone number of a


calling party on the terminal of a called party.

No

Distinctive ringing
service

The distinctive ringing service plays different ring tones


for incoming calls.

No

Differentiated
ringback tone
service

The differentiated ringback tone service enables the SIP


AG to play different ring tones for ringback tones.

No

Advice of charge
(AoC) service

The AoC service enables the SIP AG to display the


charge rate, fee notification during a call, and the total
fee of the call.

No

Polarity reversal
charging service

The polarity reversal charging service notifies the


accounting terminal of the starting point and stop point
of accounting using polarity reversal when users are in
a conversation or end the conversation.

No

Polarity reversal
pulse charging
service

When users are in a conversation or end the


conversation, a polarity reversal pulse is generated on
an interface, notifying the accounting terminal of the
starting point and stop point of accounting.

No

Urgent call process

If the SIP AG finds an urgent call, the SIP AG inserts


the urgent call flag into the SIP message.

No

Completion of
Calls to Busy
Subscriber (CCBS)
service

When the called number is busy, the CCBS service


enables the SIP AG to monitor the called party status.
When the called party is idle, the SIP AG notifies the
calling party and determines whether to make a call
according to the status of the calling and called parties.

No

Multiple MSN
numbers on a
POTS interface

Multiple MSN numbers can be configured on a POTS


interface.

No

Hotline service

l Instant hotline service: After a user picks up a phone,


the SIP AG dials the hotline number for the user.

No

l No dialing within a long time after picking up the


phone: If a user does not dial any number within the
specified period of time after picking up the phone,
the SIP AG dials the hotline number for the user.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Service Type

Introduction

Configure
d on the
SIP AG or
Not

Anonymous call
service

The anonymous call service enables the called party not


to view information about incoming calls.

No

License Support
The SIPAG function is used with a license. To use the SIPAG function, apply for and purchase
the following license from the Huawei local office:
AR2200 value-added service package for voice services
To use the BEST function, you must purchase the CM&BEST License in addition to the precedng
licenses.

1.3 Configuring the AR2200 to Work in SIP AG Mode


Before configuring SIP AG service features, configure the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode.

Applicable Environment
You can configure the AR2200 to work in SIP AG or PBX mode. Before configuring SIP AG
service features, configure the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode. You can run the display voice
service-mode command to view the working mode of the AR2200. If the AR2200 works in
PBX mode, delete the PBX configurations and configure the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode.
If the AR2200 works in SIP AG mode, skip this configuration.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode, complete the following task:
l

Configuring IP addresses for interfaces and routing protocols to ensure connectivity

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
service-mode sipag

The AR2200 is configured to work in SIP AG mode.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.


Step 5 Run:
quit

Return to the user view.


Step 6 Run:
save

The configuration is saved.


Step 7 Run:
reboot

The AR2200 is restarted.


NOTE

After the AR2200 is configured to work in SIP AG mode, restart the AR2200 to make the configuration
take effect.

----End

Checking the Configuration


After the configuration is complete, the AR2200 works in SIP AG mode.
Run the display voice service-mode command to check the working mode of the AR2200.

1.4 Configuring a SIP AG Interface


This section describes how to configure a SIP AG interface.

1.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task


Before configuring a SIP AG interface, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
To allow the SIP AG and IMS network to exchange media and signaling streams, the media and
signaling IP addresses, signaling port number, and transmission protocol need to be configured.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a SIP AG interface, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode

Data Preparation
To configure a SIP AG interface, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

No.

Data

Media and signaling IP addresses

SIP AG interface number, media and signaling IP addresses, signaling port number,
IP addresses and port numbers of primary and secondary proxy servers, transmission
protocol, and home domain name

1.4.2 Configuring Media and Signaling IP Address Pools


Media and signaling IP address pools provide media and signaling IP addresses for SIP AG
interfaces.

Context
A SIP AG interface must obtain media and signaling IP addresses from media and signaling IP
address pools respectively. The signaling IP address pool stores IP addresses of SIP AG
interfaces and the media IP address pool stores IP addresses of media streams. Media and
signaling IP address pools can contain the same IP addresses.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
voip-address media interface interface-type interface-number { ip-address |
dynamic }

A media IP address pool is configured.


Step 4 Run:
voip-address signalling interface interface-type interface-number { ip-address |
dynamic }

A signaling IP address pool is configured.


When configuring media and signaling IP address pools:
l To specify the ip-address parameter, ensure that an IP address has been configured for the
specified interface.
l To specify the dynamic parameter, ensure that an IP address has been dynamically assigned
to the specified interface.
----End

1.4.3 Setting Parameters on the SIP AG Interface


This section describes how to set parameters on a SIP AG interface.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Context
To allow the SIP AG and IMS network to exchange media and signaling streams, set the media
and signaling IP addresses, signaling port number, and transmission protocol.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 (Optional) Run:
local-digitmap name-value { append | type { normal | emergency | scc | directcentrex | second-centrex } }body-value

The digitmap is configured.


Step 4 Run:
sipag sipag-interface-id

A SIP AG interface is created and the SIP AG interface view is displayed.


Step 5 Set mandatory parameters on the SIP AG interface.
Parameter

Command

Remarks

Media IP address

media-addr { media-ip | addr-name


addr-name }

The media IP address


of the SIP AG interface
must be obtained from
the media IP address
pool.

Signaling IP address and


signaling port number

signalling-addr { signal-ip | addrname signal-addr-name } signal-port

The signaling IP
address of the SIP AG
interface must be
obtained from the
signaling IP address
pool.
By default, no
signaling port number
is configured for a SIP
AG interface.

Paramet
ers for
the
primary
proxy
server
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Static IP
address

primary-proxy-addr static static-ipaddress static-ip-address-port

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

By default, no static IP
address is configured
for the primary proxy
server.

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Parameter

1 SIPAG Configuration

Command

Remarks

DNS-A
domain name
and port
number

primary-proxy-addr dns-a dns-adomain-name dns-a-port-number

By default, no DNS-A
domain name or port
number is configured
for the primary proxy
server.

DNS-NAPTR
domain name

primary-proxy-addr dns-naptr dnsnaptr-domain-name

By default, no DNSNAPTR domain name


is configured for the
primary proxy server.

DNS-SRV
domain name

primary-proxy-addr dns-srv dnssrv-domain-name

By default, no DNSSRV domain name is


configured for the
primary proxy server.

Transmission protocol

transfer transfer-protocol

By default, a SIP AG
interface uses the User
Datagram Protocol
(UDP) protocol as the
transmission protocol.

Home domain name

home-domain home-domain-value

By default, no home
domain name is
configured for a SIP
AG interface.

Step 6 Set optional parameters on the SIP AG interface.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Parameter

Command

Remarks

Description

description description

By default, no
description is
configured for a SIP
AG interface.

Profile index

profile profile-index

By default, the profile


index of a SIP AG
interface is 1.

Domain name

ag-domain ag-domain-name

By default, no domain
name is configured for
a SIP AG interface.

Conference factory URI

conference-factory-uri uri

By default, no
conference factory
URI is configured for a
SIP AG interface.

Authent
ication

auth mode mode-value

By default, the
authentication mode is
user.

Authenticatio
n mode

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

1 SIPAG Configuration

Parameter

Command

Remarks

paramet
ers

auth username auth-username


password { cipher | ha1 { cipher |
simple password-value1 } | simple
password value2 }

By default, no
authentication user
name or password is
configured for a SIP
AG user.

Timer value

digitmap-timer { long long-timervalue | short short-timer-value | start


start-timer-value }

By default, the value of


a digitmap long timer is
20s, the value of a
digitmap short timer is
4s, and the value of a
digitmap start timer is
20s.

DTMF parameters

dtmf-transmission-mode
{ thoroughly | erase }

By default, the DTMF


transmission mode is
transparent
transmission.

Fax/
Modem
paramet
ers

Fax/Modem
codec
negotiation
mode

fax-modem common negotiationmode { negotiate | self-switch }

By default, the fax/


modem codec
negotiation mode is
negotiation.

Packetization
interval in
transparent
transmission
mode

fax-modem common rtp-interval


{ 5ms | 10ms | 20ms | 30ms }

By default, the
packetization interval
in transparent
transmission mode is
10 ms.

VBD attribute
type

fax-modem common vbd-attributetype { chinatelecom |


extchinatelecom | ietf | v152 }

By default, the VBD


attribute type is V.152.

VBD codec
mode

fax-modem common vbd-codec


{ g711a | g711u }

By default, the VBD


codec mode is A-law
algorithm in G.711.

VBD payload
type

fax-modem common vbd-pt-type


{ dynamic | static }

By default, the VBD


payload type is static.

Fax
transmission
mode

fax-modem fax transmission-mode


{ thoroughly | t38 }

By default, the fax


transmission mode of a
SIP AG interface is
transparent
transmission.

Modem
transmission
mode

fax-modem modem transmissionmode { thoroughly | relay }

By default, the modem


transmission mode of a
SIP AG interface is
transparent
transmission.

Authenticatio
n user name
and password

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

1 SIPAG Configuration

Parameter

Command

Remarks

Paramet
ers of
the
seconda
ry proxy
server

Static IP
address and
port number

secondary-proxy-addr static staticip-address static-ip-address-port

By default, no static IP
address or port number
is configured for the
secondary proxy
server.

DNS-A
domain name
and port
number

secondary-proxy-addr dns-a dns-adomain-name dns-a-port-number

By default, no DNS-A
domain name or port
number is configured
for the secondary proxy
server.

DNS-NAPTR
domain name

secondary-proxy-addr dns-naptr
dns-naptr-domain-name

By default, no DNSNAPTR domain name


is configured for the
secondary proxy
server.

DNS-SRV
domain name

secondary-proxy-addr dns-srv dnssrv-domain-name

By default, no DNSSRV domain name is


configured for the
secondary proxy
server.

Mode used for sending


DHCP Request messages

proxy-dhcp-option option-value

By default, the mode


used for sending DHCP
Request messages is
none.

Software parameters

ag number-parameter name value

Different software
parameters may use
different value ranges.
For details, see ag
number-parameter.

String parameters

ag string-parameter strpara-name
strpara-value

For details about string


parameters, see ag
string-parameter.

RFC
2833
transmis
sion

RFC 2833
DTMF
transmission

nte-dtmf { enable | disable }

By default, RFC 2833


DTMF transmission is
enabled.

RFC 2833 fax


and modem
transmission

nte-fax-modem { enable | disable }

By default, RFC 2833


fax and modem
transmission is
enabled.

RFC 2833
hookflash
transmission

nte-flash-hook { enable | disable }

By default, RFC 2833


hookflash transmission
is disabled.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Parameter
Mode in
which RFC
2833
transmission
is started
based on
negotiation
Proxy
function
s

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

1 SIPAG Configuration

Command

Remarks

nte-negotiation-mode mode-value

By default, RFC 2833


redundancy
transmission is started
based on negotiation in
passive-nego mode.

Mode used by proxy-detect-mode { option | probe |


a SIP AG to
register }
detect a proxy
server

By default, a SIP AG
uses the probe mode to
detect a proxy server.

Mode in
which a SIP
AG is dual
homed to
proxy servers

proxy-dual-home { disable | manualswitchover | auto-switchover }

By default, a SIP AG
supports dual homing
but does not support
automatic switchover.

Mode used by
a SIP AG to
update the
proxy server
address

proxy-refresh-mode { no-switch |
defer | immediate }

By default, a SIP AG
updates the proxy
server IP address after
a delay (defer mode).

Registration of a SIP AG
with the specified proxy
server

proxy-switchover { primary |
secondary }

To maintain or
troubleshoot the
current proxy server,
run this command.

RFC
2198
redunda
ncy
transmis
sion

Mode in
which RFC
2198
redundancy
transmission
is started

redundancy-negotiation-mode
negotiation-mode

By default, RFC 2198


redundancy
transmission is started
in no-initiative-start
mode.

Transmission
of RFC 2833
audio data
using RFC
2198
redundancy
transmission

redundancy-nte { enable | disable }

By default, a SIP AG is
disabled from using
RFC 2198 redundancy
transmission to
transmit the RFC 2833
audio data.

Mode in
which RFC
2198
redundancy
transmission
is started

redundancy-start-mode mode-value

By default, RFC 2198


redundancy
transmission is started
in ordinary mode.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Parameter

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

1 SIPAG Configuration

Command

Remarks

VBD
transmission
using RFC
2198
redundancy
transmission

redundancy-vbd { enable | disable }

By default, a SIP AG is
enabled to transmit
VBD using RFC 2198
redundancy
transmission.

Voice
transmission
using RFC
2198
redundancy
transmission

redundancy-voice { enable |
disable }

By default, a SIP AG
does not use RFC 2198
redundancy
transmission to
transmit voice.

Registrar URI

register-server-uri uri

By default, no registrar
URI is configured for a
SIP AG.

Ringing parameters

ring-mode index ringmode-name


[ cadence-ring cadencering-value |
initial-ring initialring-value ] *

By default, ringing
parameters of a SIP AG
is empty.

SCTP stack parameters

sctp { assoc-maximumretransmission assoc-max-retrans |


checksum-arithmetic checksum-arith
| heartbeat-interval hb-interval |
high-congestion-level highcongestion-level-value | in-streamnumber in-stream-num | lowcongestion-level low-congestionlevel-value | maximum-initretransmission max-init-retrans | nocongestion-level no-congestion-levelvalue | out-stream-number outstream-num | path-maximumretransmission path-max-retrans |
rto-alpha rto-alpha-value | rto-beta
rto-beta-value | rto-init rto-init-value |
rto-maximum rto-max | valid-cookielife valid-cookie-life-value | }

After SCTP stack


parameters are set,
reset the SIP AG to
make SCTP stack
parameters take effect.

SDP negotiation mode

sdp-negotiation-mode { local |
remote }

By default, the remote


priority mode is used
for SDP negotiation.

Index of the service logic


used by a SIP AG

service-logic service-logic-index

By default, the service


logic index of a SIP AG
is 0.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Parameter

Command

Remarks

Mapping between a call


scenario and a status code

status-code-mapping scene statuscode

After configuring the


status code of a call
scenario, reset the SIP
AG to make the
configuration take
effect.

MWI
subscrip
tion
function

MWI
subscription
function

subscribe mwi { enable | disable }

By default, the MWI


subscription function is
disabled.

Register
status
subscription
function

subscribe reg { enable | disable }

By default, the register


status subscription
function is disabled.

UA profile
subscription
function

subscribe ua-profile { enable |


disable }

By default, the UA
profile subscription
function is enabled on a
SIP AG.

Codec priority, codec


value, and packetization
interval

user-defined-profile codec-priority
pri-value codec-value pt-value

If you change the


priority of a codec
value, priorities of
other codec values are
also changed.

Software parameter with


a specified sequence
number

user-defined-profile numberparameter strpara-no strpara-value

Priority of a service type

user-defined-profile service-priority
pri-value srvid-value

If you change the


priority of a service
type, priorities of other
service types are also
changed.

----End

1.4.4 Checking the Configuration


Procedure
l

Run the display voice sipag [ sipag-interface-id { running | config } ] command to check
the configuration of SIP AG parameters.

Run the display voice voip-address command to check the signaling and media IP
addresses pool.

----End

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

1.5 (Optional) Setting Parameters for Voice Interfaces


This section describes how to set parameters for voice interfaces.

1.5.1 Setting Parameters for an FXS Interface


This section describes how to set parameters for an FXS interface.

Applicable Environment
An FXS interface connects to a POTS phone. To achieve high transmission efficiency on an
FXS interface, properly set parameters for the FXS interface on the AR2200, including physical
attributes, electrical attributes, and KC attributes.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting parameters for an FXS interface, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in SIPAG mode

Ensuring that the voice 4FXS1FXO board is working properly

Data Preparation
To set parameters for an FXS interface, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Polarity reversal pulse level width, polarity reversal mode, and dialing mode

Current, impedance, send gain, and receive gain

High-level pulse width, low-level pulse width, KC accounting mode, and voltage
operating

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
port fxs slotid/subcardid/portid

The FXS interface view is displayed.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Step 4 Set physical attributes for the FXS interface.


l Run:
reverse-pole-pulse enable

The polarity reversal pulse function is enabled.


l Run:
reverse-pole-pulse level level-value

The polarity reversal pulse level width is set.


l Run:
polarity-reverse-mode { hard

| soft }

The polarity reversal mode is set.


l Run:
clip-reverse-pole-pulse enable

The CLIP polarity reversal pulse function is enabled.


l Run:
dial-mode { dtmf | pulse | both }

The dialing mode is set.


l Run:
line-lock enable

Port locking is enabled.


l Run:
nlp-mode { disable | normal | ec-gain-adjust | enhance | reduce }

The non-linear processing (NLP) mode is set.


Step 5 Set electrical attributes for the FXS interface.
l Run:
electric current current-value

The current is set.


l Run:
electric impedance impedance-value

The impedance is set.


l Run:
electric send-gain sendgain-value

The send gain is set.


l Run:
electric receive-gain recvgain-value

The receive gain is set.


Step 6 Set KC attributes for the FXS interface.
l Run:
kc high-level highlevel

The high-level pulse width is set.


l Run:
kc low-level lowlevel

The low-level pulse width is set.


l Run:
kc type { 16kc | 12kc }

The KC accounting mode is set.


l Run:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

kc voltage voltage

The voltage operating is set.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice port fxs [ state ] [ slotid/subcardid/portid ] command to check the FXS
interface configuration.

1.5.2 Setting parameters for a BRA Interface


This section describes how to set parameters for a BRA interface.

Applicable Environment
A basic rate access (BRA) interface connects to an ISDN phone. On the AR2200, you can enable
the BRA interface Layer 2 monitoring, remote power supply, automatic deactivation, and alarm
functions, and set the working mode and Layer 1 activation mode on a BRA interface.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting parameters for a BRA interface, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in SIPAG mode

Ensuring that the 2BST board is working properly

Data Preparation
To set parameters for a BRA interface, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Interface working mode, automatic deactivation delay, and Layer 1 activation mode

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
port bra slotid/subcardid/portid

The BRA interface view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
l2-monitor enable

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

BRA interface Layer 2 monitoring is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
work-mode { p2p | p2mp }

The working mode is set.


Step 6 Run:
remote-power enable

Remote power supply is enabled.


Step 7 Run:
auto-deactive enable

Automatic deactivation is enabled.


Step 8 Run:
auto-deactive delay delay

The automatic deactivation delay is set.


Step 9 Run:
active-mode { unstable | stable }

The Layer 1 activation mode is set.


Step 10 Run:
alarm enable

The alarm function is enabled.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice port bra [ state ] [ slotid/subcardid/portid ] command to check the BRA
interface configuration.

1.5.3 Setting Parameters for a PRA Interface


This section describes how to set parameters for a PRA interface.

Applicable Environment
A PRA interface connects to a PBX or PSTN network. On the AR2200, you can enable the
CRC4 check, E1 interface Layer 2 monitoring, and E1 interface pulse code modulation (PCM)
alarm functions, and set the CRC alarm threshold and E1 interface signaling mode on a PRA
interface.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting parameters for a PRA interface, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in SIPAG mode

Ensuring that the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M board is working properly

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Data Preparation
To set parameters for a PRA interface, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Access digital section mode

CRC alarm threshold and signaling mode of the E1 interface

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
set workmode slot slot-id

e1t1 e1-voice

The E1 interface board is configured as an E1 voice card.


Step 3 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
port ve1 slotid/subcardid/portid

The PRA interface view is displayed.


Step 5 Run:
access-mode { digital | direct }

The access digital section mode is set.


Step 6 Run:
crc4 enable

CRC4 check is enabled.


Step 7 Run:
crc-alarm-threshold { es es-threshold | cses cses-threshold | dm dm- threshold }

The CRC alarm threshold is set.


Step 8 Run:
l2-monitor enable

E1 interface Layer 2 monitoring is enabled.


Step 9 Run:
pcm-alarm

The PCM alarm function is enabled.


Step 10 Run:
signal { CCS | CAS }

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

The signaling mode is set.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice port ve1 [ state ] [ slotid/subcardid/portid ] command to check the PRA
interface configuration.

1.6 (Optional) Setting Voice Parameters on a SIP AG


This section describes how to set voice parameters on a SIP AG.

1.6.1 Setting System Parameters


This section describes how to set system parameters.

Establishing the Configuration Task


Before setting system parameters, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
The AR2200 working in SIP AG mode can exchange information with a softswitch device using
SIP. Different countries and regions use different voice parameter standards; therefore, set voice
parameters on the SIP AG in accordance with local standards.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting system parameters, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode

Configuring IP addresses and routing protocols for interfaces to ensure connectivity

Data Preparation
To set system parameters, you need the following data.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

No.

Data

Country/Region identifier

Lower threshold and upper threshold for hookflash pressing

MWI mode

Codec mode for voice services

AC amplitude of the ringing current, frequency of the ringing current, and cadence
ratio
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

No.

Data

CLIP parameters in offhook state:

1 SIPAG Configuration

l Interval between the time when the ACK message is received and the time when
the FSK is transmitted
l Maximum duration between the time when the DT-AS is transmitted and the time
when the ACK message is received
l Duration of the DT-AS
l Level of the DT-AS
l Level of the FSK
l Number of bits of the FSK synchronization mask
7

CLIP parameters in onhook state:


l Number of bits seized by a channel
l Duration of the DT-AS
l Interval between the time when the DT-AS is transmitted and the time when the
FSK is transmitted
l Level of the DT-AS
l Level of the FSK
l Number of bits of the FSK synchronization mask

Maximum uplink bandwidth and reserved bandwidth for emergency calls

Configuring a Country/Region Identifier


This section describes how to configure a country/region identifier.

Applicable Environment
A country/region identifier is configured on a SIP AG so that user terminals connect to the SIP
AG can comply with the local standard.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
country { brazil | britain-msfuk | britain-etsi | bulgaria | china-hongkong
china-mainland | egypt | france | singapore | thailand }

A country/region identifier is configured.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

By default, a country/region identifier is China mainland.


----End

Setting Upper and Lower Thresholds for Hookflash Pressing


The upper and lower thresholds for hookflash pressing determine the hookflash duration.

Context
Hookflash or flash is a button on a telephone that simulates quickly hanging up and then picking
up again (a quick off-hook/on-hook/off-hook cycle). The hookflash can be pressed by a calling
party or a called party:
l

Hookflash pressed by a called party: If the called party user A wants to transfer an incoming
call to user B, user A can press the hookflash and dial the number of user B.

Hookflash pressed by a calling party: User A calls user B. User B answers the call and talks
with user A. User A can press the hookflash and dial the number of user C after hearing a
special dial tone.

After user A presses the hookflash:


l

If user C is busy, user A can press the hookflash and talk with user B.

If user C does not respond for a long period of time, user A can press the hookflash and
talk with user B.

If the phone of user C rings, user A hangs up and user B hears the ringback tone. User C
picks up the phone and talks with user B.

Whether a called party can be transferred to a toll call is restricted by the outgoing right of
the called party.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
flash-hook lower lower-value

The lower threshold for hookflash pressing is set.


By default, the lower threshold for hookflash pressing is 100 ms.
Step 4 Run:
flash-hook upper upper-value

The upper threshold for hookflash pressing is set.


By default, the upper threshold for hookflash pressing is 350 ms.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

NOTE

The lower threshold for hookflash pressing must be 50 ms less than the upper threshold for hookflash
pressing.

----End

Setting the MWI Mode


You need to set the MWI mode according to user habits.

Context
If there are leave messages, the user device configured with the MWI function makes the
indicator on or plays a tone, indicating that there are leave messages. You can set the MWI mode
according to user habits.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
mwi-mode { fsk-with-ring | fsk-without-ring | high-voltage }

The MWI mode is set.


----End

Configuring the Codec Mode for Voice Services


You need to configure the codec mode for voice services so that the user device can work in
compliance with the local standard.

Context
G.711, also known as Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), is a commonly used waveform codec. G.
711 defines two main compression algorithms, the -law algorithm (used in North America &
Japan) and A-law algorithm (used in Europe and China). A-law encoding takes a 13-bit signed
linear audio sample as input. -law encoding takes a 15-bit signed linear audio sample as input.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pcm { a-law | u-law }

The codec mode is configured for voice services.


----End

Enabling the AR2200 to Check the Checksum in Packets


You can enable the AR2200 to check the checksum in received messages or encapsulate the
checksum in messages to be sent.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
sctp checksum receive enable

The AR2200 is enabled to check the checksum in received messages.


l

Run:
sctp checksum send enable

The AR2200 is enabled to encapsulate the checksum in messages to be sent.


----End

Setting Ringing Parameters


You can set the AC amplitude of the ringing current, frequency of the ringing current, cadence
ratio, and initial ringing function on the AR2200 to meet local standards.

Context
Different countries and regions use different ringing standards. You can set the AC amplitude
of the ringing current to adjust the ringing tone volume, voice pitch, cadence ratio, and initial
ringing function on the AR2200 to meet local standards.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run the following command according to user requirements.
l

Run:
ring frequency { 16hz | 25hz | 50hz }

The frequency of the ringing current is set.


l

Run:
user-defined-ring ring-index { first-ring first-ring-period | first-interval
first-interval | second-ring second-ring-period | second-interval secondinterval | third-ring third-ring-period | third-interval third-interval }*

The cadence ratio of a specified user-defined ring type is set.


l

Run:
stop-initial-ring { enable | disable }

The initial ringing function is enabled.


----End

Enabling the Function That Reduces the Feed on Locked Ports


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
park-feed enable

The function that reduces the feed on locked ports is enabled.


This function takes effect for only FXS ports.
----End

Setting CLIP Parameters in Offhook State


You can set CLIP parameters in offhook state on the AR2200 so that the AR2200 can work with
the phone terminal.

Context
When the CLIP service is registered, CLIP parameters in offhook state need to be configured
on the AR2200 so that the AR2200 can work with the phone terminal. Generally, default
parameter settings are used. If CLIP parameters are not set properly, change relevant CLIP
parameters.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
clip offhook ack-fsk-interval ack-fsk-interval

The interval between the time when the ACK message is received and the time when the
frequency-shift keying (FSK) is transmitted in offhook state is set.
l

Run:
clip offhook dtas-ack-interval dtas-ack-interval

The maximum duration between the time when the dual tone-alerting signal (DT-AS) is
transmitted and the time when the ACK message is received in offhook state is set.
l

Run:
clip offhook dtas-duration dtas-dur-value

The duration of the dual tone-alerting signal (DT-AS) in offhook state is set.
l

Run:
clip offhook dtas-level dtas-level

The level of the DT-AS in offhook state is configured.


l

Run:
clip offhook fsk-level fsk-level

The level of the FSK in offhook state is configured.


l

Run:
clip offhook mark-signal-bit mark-signal-bit

The number of bits of the FSK synchronization mask in offhook state is set.
----End

Setting CLIP Parameters in Onhook State


You can set CLIP parameters in onhook state on the AR2200 so that the AR2200 can work with
the phone terminal.

Context
When the CLIP service is registered, CLIP parameters in onhook state need to be configured on
the AR2200 so that the AR2200 can work with the phone terminal. Generally, default parameter
settings are used. If CLIP parameters are not set properly, change relevant CLIP parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
clip onhook channel-seize-bit channel-seize-bit

The number of bits seized by a channel in onhook state is set.


l

Run:
clip onhook dtas-duration dtas-dur-value

The duration of the DT-AS in onhook state is set.


l

Run:
clip onhook dtas-fsk-interval dtas-fsk-interval

The interval between the time when the DT-AS is transmitted and the time when the FSK
is transmitted in onhook state is set.
l

Run:
clip onhook dtas-level dtas-level

The level of the DT-AS in onhook state is configured.


l

Run:
clip onhook fsk-level fsk-level

The level of the FSK in onhook state is configured.


l

Run:
clip onhook mark-signal-bit marksignal-bit

The number of bits of the FSK synchronization mask in onhook state is set.
----End

Setting Uplink Bandwidth Parameters


This section describes how to set uplink bandwidth parameters.

Context
The AR2200 provides uplink bandwidth control. When the system detects that the uplink
bandwidth usage reaches the configured upper threshold, it restricts calls and generates an alarm.
If the uplink bandwidth is insufficient, the system processes calls based on user levels. Common
users may not obtain services.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
media-bandwidth-control enable

The AR2200 is enabled to restrict calls when the uplink bandwidth is enabled.
l

Run:
media-bandwidth-control maximum max-bandwidth

The maximum uplink bandwidth is set.


l

Run:
media-bandwidth-control reserved-for-emergency reserved-bandwidth

The reserved bandwidth is set for emergency calls.


NOTE

The reserved bandwidth for emergency calls must be smaller than the maximum uplink bandwidth
configured by the media-bandwidth-control maximum command.

----End

Setting the Number of SIP Register Messages Sent Every Second


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sip-reg-count-per-second reg-count-value

The number of SIP register messages sent every second is set.


----End

Checking the Configuration


After the configuration of system parameters is complete, you can view the system parameters
such as the SIP interface's IP address, upper and lower thresholds for hookflash pressing, and
CLIP parameters.

Procedure
l

Run the display voice configuration command to check the voice configuration.

Run the display voice user-defined-ring [ring-index ] command to check user-defined


ring information.

Run the display voice clip command to check CLIP parameters.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Run the display voice sip-reg-count-per-second command to check the number of SIP
Register messages initiated per second.

----End

1.6.2 Setting SIP Stack Parameters


This section describes how to set SIP stack parameters.

Establishing the Configuration Task


Before setting SIP stack parameters, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
SIP is an IETF-defined signaling protocol widely used for controlling communication sessions
such as voice and video calls over Internet Protocol (IP). SIP, RTP, RTCP, RTSP, and other
protocols constitute a SIP protocol stack.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting SIP protocol stack parameters, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode

Configuring IP addresses and routing protocols for interfaces to ensure connectivity

Data Preparation
To set SIP protocol stack parameters, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Minimum value of the session timer, value of the unreliable provisional


response retransmission timer, value of the reliable provisional response
retransmission timer, value of the T1 timer, value of the T2 timer, value of the
T4 timer, and value of the TD timer

Values of the Max-forwards field, Organization header field, Server header


field, and User-Agent header field

Setting the Values of Timers


This section describes how to set values of timers of the SIP stack.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sip

The SIP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
entity-based-sessions-timer enable

The session timer defined by RFC 4028 based on the UA is defined.


l

Run:
min-se min-seperiod

The minimum value of the session timer is set.


l

Run:
session-progress session-progressperiod

The value of the unreliable provisional response retransmission timer is set.


l

Run:
session-rel-progress session-rel-progressperiod

The value of the reliable provisional response retransmission timer is set.


l

Run:
t1 t1period

The value of the T1 timer is set.


l

Run:
t2 t2period

The value of the T2 timer is set.


l

Run:
t4 t4period

The value of the T4 timer is set.


l

Run:
td tdperiod

The value of the TD timer is set.


----End

Setting Values of Header Fields


This section describes how to set values of header fields.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sip

The SIP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
header-folding enable

Header folding in the authentication header field is enabled.


l

Run:
field-header max-forwards max-forwards-value

The value of the Max-forwards header field is set.


l

Run:
field-header organization organization-head

The value of the Organization header field is set.


l

Run:
field-header server server-head

The value of the Server header field is set.


l

Run:
field-header user-agent user-agent-head

The value of the User-agent header field is set.


----End

Checking the Configuration


After the configuration is complete, you can view the configured SIP stack parameters.

Procedure
l

Run the display voice sip command to check SIP parameters.

----End

1.6.3 Setting DSP Parameters


This section describes how to set DSP parameters.

Establishing the Configuration Task


Before setting DSP parameters, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete
the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This will help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Applicable Environment
The digital signal processing (DSP) collects, converts, filters, measures, enhances, compresses,
or identifies signals and coverts the signal from an analog to a digital form.
The DSP module converts analog voice signals into digital signals and stores a certain number
of digital signals into packets for transmission. To improve the voice communication quality,
the DSP needs to further process voice signals.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting DSP parameters, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode

Configuring IP addresses and routing protocols for interfaces to ensure connectivity

Data Preparation
To set DSP parameters, you need the following data.
No.

Data

VBD switching mode

Default DSP channel code type and default interval at which the DSP channel
packetizes RTP packets

T.30 redundancy parameter value of the T.38 fax, T.4 redundancy parameter value
of the T.38 fax, fax training mode, and maximum fax training rate

Alarm threshold of the dynamic jitter buffer, initial value of the dynamic jitter buffer,
maximum value of the dynamic jitter buffer, maximum value of the static jitter buffer,
minimum value of the dynamic jitter buffer, minimum value of the static jitter buffer,
and initial value of the static jitter buffer of a DSP channel

RTP payload type value, G.726-16k payload type value, G.726-24k payload type
value, G.726-32k payload type value, G.726-40k payload type value, NTE payload
type value, redundancy payload type value, and VBD payload value of a DSP channel

Interval at which a DSP channel sends RTCP packets and threshold for the number
of severe degrade seconds

Resource threshold in hierarchical control mode

Data event transmission mode, special process, DTMF transmission mode, echo
cancellation function, input gain, output gain, jitter buffer mode, NLP mode, and DSP
working mode in a DSP template

DSP loopback type and DSP channel parameters

Enabling Echo Cancellation on a DSP Channel


This section describes how to enable echo cancellation on a DSP channel.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Context
A user may hear the user's echo in the phone receiver in a conversation. If a proper delay in the
transmitted or received signal is set, the echo can be removed. If the delay exceeds 25 ms, the
voice quality deteriorates and the conversation ends. You can enable echo cancellation on a DSP
channel to remove echoes.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
echo enable

Echo cancellation is enabled on the DSP channel.


----End

Enabling the PLC Function on a DSP Channel


This section describes how to enable the packet loss concealment (PLC) function on a DSP
channel.

Context
PLC is a technique that masks the effects of packet loss in VoIP communications. PLC is
effective only when the packet loss ratio is low. During communication, the average packet loss
ratio may be low, but a high burst packet loss ratio results in severe voice quality deterioration.
PLC can insert a static frame in the place where a packet is lost, regenerate a packet received
prior to the lost one, or generate an analog voice packet. If packets are lost during communication
and PLC is not used, the voice communication is interrupted. You can use a proper PLC
algorithm to minimize effects of packet losses.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
plc enable

The PLC function is enabled on the DSP channel.


----End

Enabling Silence Compression on a DSP Channel


You can enable silence compression on a DSP channel to reduce the number of sent voice
packets.

Context
To save network bandwidth, enable silence compression on a DSP channel. When no voice is
detected, the encoder generates short silence codes, but does not generate voice compression
codes. In addition, the encoder notifies the receiver of silence start until the voice is restored.
The silence compression function reduces the number of sent voice packets.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
silence enable

Silence compression is enabled on the DSP channel.


----End

Setting the VBD Switching Mode


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
autovbd { auto | host-controlled }

The VBD switching mode is configured.


NOTE

By default, the VBD switching mode is host-controlled.

----End

Setting the Default DSP Channel Code Type and the Default Interval at Which a
DSP Channel Packetizes RTP Packets
This section describes how to set the default DSP channel code type and the default interval at
which a DSP channel packetizes RTP packets.

Context
The voice encoding technique encodes pulse-code modulation (PCM) samples into bits (frames).
This technique ensures robustness of voice services when the error code, network jitter, or burst
traffic occurs on a link. At the receiver side, voice frames are encoded into PCM samples, and
then are converted into voice waveforms. Different voice encoding techniques provide different
voice quality and a good voice quality requires high bandwidth.
In VoIP, before voice data are transmitted as UDP packets, the Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) processes the voice data. RTP is used to transmit real-time data and can transmit audio
and video data.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

codec code { g711a | g711u | g723_1 | g729 | g726-16k | g726-24k | g726-32k |


g726-40k } [ rtp-interval { 5ms | 10ms | 20ms | 30ms } ]

The default DSP channel code type and the default interval at which a DSP channel packetizes
RTP packets are set.
----End

Setting Fax Parameters


This section describes how to set fax parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Set fax parameters.
l

Run:
fax redundancy-t4 redundancy-t4value

The T.4 redundancy parameter value of the T.38 fax is set.


l

Run:
fax redundancy-t30 redundancy-t30value

The T.30 redundancy parameter value of the T.38 fax is set.


l

Run:
fax training-mode { e2e | local }

The fax training mode is set.


l

Run:
fax training-rate { v17 | v29 | v27 }

The maximum fax training rate is set.


l

Run:
fax v8negotiate enable

V8 negotiation is enabled.
----End

Setting Jitter Buffer Parameters


This section describes how to set jitter buffer parameters to improve the voice quality.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Context
Delay variations in voice packet arrival time can occur because of network congestion or route
changes. To reduce sound distortion caused by the delay jitter and packet loss, a jitter buffer is
used. You can set proper jitter buffer parameters to minimize delay variations so that packets
can be processed in a timely manner and smooth voice communication can be provided as much
as possible.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Set parameters for the Jitter Buffer.
l

Run:
jitter-buffer adapt-jb-threshold adapt-jb-threshold

The alarm threshold of the dynamic jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer init-adapt-jb init-adapt-jb-value

The initial value of the dynamic jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer init-fixed-jb normal-fixed-jb-value

The initial value of the static jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer max-adapt-jb max-adapt-jb-value

The maximum value of the dynamic jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer min-adapt-jb min-adapt-jb-value

The minimum value of the dynamic jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer max-fixed-jb max-fixed-jb-value

The maximum value of the static jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer min-fixed-jb min-fixed-jb-value

The minimum value of the static jitter buffer is set.


----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Setting the Payload Type Value


This section describes how to set the payload type value.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Set Payload Type parameters.
NOTE

The following payload type values must be different.

Run:
payload-type clear-mode clearmode-value

The RTP payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type g726-16k g726-16k-value

The G.726-16k payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type g726-24k g726-24k-value

The G.726-24k payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type g726-32k g726-32k-value

The G.726-32k payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type g726-40k g726-40k-value

The G.726-40k payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type nte nte-value

The NTE payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type redundancy redundancy-value

The redundancy payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type vbd vbd-value

The VBD payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Setting RTCP Parameters


This section describes how to set RTP control protocol (RTCP) parameters.

Context
RTCP monitors the quality of service and conveys information about participants in an on-going
session. RTCP periodically sends packets to all the participants in the session to monitor the
quality of service and obtain identity information about the participants.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
rtcp rtcp-interval rtcp-interval

The interval at which a DSP channel sends RTCP packets is set.


l

Run:
rtcp rtcpxr enable

The RTP Control Protocol Extended Reports (RTCP XR) function is enabled.
l

Run:
rtcp sev-degradethreshold sev-degradethresholdval

The threshold for the number of severe degrade seconds is set.


l

Run:
rtcp vqm enable

The Voice Quality Monitor (VQM) function is enabled.


----End

Setting DSP Resource Parameters


This section describes how to set DSP resource parameters.

Context
DSP resources are limited and users have different requirements for DSP resources. To control
and allocate DSP resources properly, set the DSP resource control mode and the resource
threshold in hierarchical control mode.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
resource-threshold mode { priority | normal }

The DSP resource control mode is configured.


l

Run:
resource-threshold { threshold1 threshold1 | threshold2 threshold2 |
threshold3 threshold3 }

The resource threshold in hierarchical control mode is set.


The resource threshold in hierarchical control mode can be set only when the DSP resource
control mode is priority.
----End

Configuring a DSP Template


This section describes how to configure a DSP template.

Context
To customize DSP parameters for data services, configure a DSP template. After a DSP template
is configured, specify the template for users according to the port and phone number. The DSP
template improves the call connection rate. After a template is specified successfully, parameters
in the DSP template take effect immediately.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
template name

A DSP template is created.


Step 5 Set parameters in the DSP template.
l

Run:
data-event data-event-value

The data event transmission mode is configured.


l

Run:
dsp-special-flow dsp-special-flow-value

A special process is configured.


l

Run:
dtmf dtmf-value

The Dual-Tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) transmission mode is configured.


l

Run:
echo-cancel { enable | disable }

The echo cancellation function is enabled or disabled.


l

Run:
input-gain input-gain-value

The input gain is set.


l

Run:
output-gain output-gain-value

The output gain is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer { dynamic | static }

The jitter buffer mode is configured.


l

Run:
nlp nlp-value

The normal link pulse (NLP) transmission mode is configured.


l

Run:
work-mode work-mode-value

The DSP working mode is configured.


l

Run:
vbd redundancy

Voice band data (VBD) redundancy transmission is enabled.


----End

Configuring a DSP Channel


This section describes how to configure a DSP channel.

Context
You can enable a digital signal processor (DSP) channel to work in loopback mode, and set the
loopback mode (PCM-side loopback test and IP-side loopback test). When the DSP channel
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

between the calling party and called party cannot transmit signals or can transmit signals only
in one direction, run the loop-back command to locate the fault. If the calling party hears the
echo in a PCM-side loopback test, the speech channel between the calling phone and the calling
DSP channel is functioning properly. If the called party hears the echo in an IP-side loopback
test, the speech channel between the called phone and the calling DSP channel is functioning
properly.
To control resources of DSP channels, prohibit the DSP channels. The prohibited DSP channels
cannot participate in resource allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp slot/dsp-index

The DSP resource management view is displayed.


Step 4 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
loop-back loopback-type channel

The loopback function is configured on a DSP channel.


l

Run:
prohibit channel [ count ]

DSP channels are prohibited.


----End

Checking the Configuration


After the configuration of DSP parameters is complete, you can view the DSP parameters
including fax parameters and jitter buffer parameters.

Procedure
l

Run the display voice dsp-attribute command to check the DSP configuration.

Run the display voice dsp state { slot/dsp-index | channel slot/dsp-index/channel }


command to check the status of a DSP or DSP channel.

Run the display voice dsp-template command to check the DSP template configuration.

----End

1.7 Configuring a SIPAG User


This section describes how to configure a SIPAG user.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

1.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task


Before configuring a SIP AG user, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
On the IMS, a SIP AG is directly connected to a user terminal. You need to set parameters for
users on the SIP AG so that the users can use services on the IMS.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a SIP AG user, complete the following tasks:
l

Setting the operation mode to SIP AG

Configuring a SIP AG interface

Data Preparation
To configure a SIP AG user, you need the following data.
No.

Data

SIP AG user port number, SIP AG ID for the SIP AG user, and phone number of the
SIP AG user

(Optional) SIP AG user in the SIP service data profile, and phone number of the SIP
AG user in the SIP service data profile

1.7.2 Setting Parameters for a SIP AG User


This section describes how to set parameters for a SIP AG user.

Applicable Environment
On the IMS, a SIP AG is directly connected to a user terminal. You need to set parameters for
users on the SIP AG so that the users can use services on the IMS.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

sipaguser sipaguser-name [ port interface-number ]

A SIP AG user is created and the SIP AG user view is displayed.


After creating a SIP AG user, set parameters for the SIP AG user, including the interface number
and basic phone number associated to the SIP AG User.
Step 4 Run:
agid sipag-interface-ID

A SIP AG ID is specified for the SIP AG user.


Step 5 Run:
base-telno telno-value [ sipagusergroup usergroup-id ]

The basic phone number is configured for the SIP AG user.


Step 6 Set optional parameters for the SIP AG user.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Parameter

Command

Default Setting

Timeslot status

active-mask time-slot time-slot-value


config-status config-status-value

NOTE
This command is valid only on
VE1 interfaces.

Maximum
number of
automatic
recovery
attempts from
deterioration

auto-resume-limit auto-resume-limit

20

SIP AG's
capability to
support the
BELL ANS
flag

bell-ans-flag { enable | disable }

Calling
number format

clip-format { sdmffsk | mdmffsk | dtmf |


r15 | etsi }

FSK simple data format

Sequence in
which the
calling number
of a SIP AG
user is
displayed

clip-transmission-sequence { after-ring |
before-ring }

after-ring

Power-off
interval

dc-time dc-time

10 ms

Single-tone
ANSbar signal
detection

detect-ansbar-by-single-tone { enable |
disable }

disable

DSP chip input


gain

dsp-input-gain dsp-input-gain

0 dB

NOTE
This command is valid only on VE1 and BRA
interfaces.

disable
NOTE
This command is valid only on
FXS interfaces.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Parameter

Command

Default Setting

DSP chip
output gain

dsp-output-gain dsp-output-gain

0 dB

DSP template
name

dsp-template dsp-template

No DSP template name


configured

Service
termination of
a specified SIP
AG user

endservice { defer [ maxcobtime


maxcobtime-value ] | immediate }

By default, services of a SIP


AG user are not terminated.

Extended
phone number

extend-telno telno-value
[ sipagusergroup usergroup-id ]

No extended phone number


configured

FSK call
display mode

fsk-mode { BELL_202 | CCITT_V23 |


NTT }

BELL_202

FSK delay

fsk-time fsk-time

10 ms

User type

line-type { DEL | ECPBX | LCPBX |


PayPhone }

DEL

SIP AG user
priority

priority { cat1 | cat2 | cat3 }

cat3

TAS mode of
CLIP

tas-pattern { NO-TAS | DT-AS }

NO-TAS

UNI fault
reporting
function

uni-report { enable | disable }

disable

NOTE
This command is valid only on VE1 and BRA
interfaces.

Voice quality
enhancement
(VQE)
function

vqe-agc { enable | disable }

disable

Target VQE
level

vqe-agc-level vqe-agc-level

13

VQE noise
suppression

vqe-sns { enable | disable }

disable

Noise
suppression
level

vqe-sns-level vqe-sns-level

12 dB

----End

1.7.3 Configuring a SIP AG User Group


This section describes how to configure a SIP AG user group.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sipagusergroup sipag-interface-id usergroup-id

A SIP AG user group is created.


Step 4 Set parameters for the SIP AG user group.
l

Run:
group-name usergroup-name

The description is configured.


l

Run:
auth username auth-username password { cipher | ha1 { cipher | simple authpassword1 } | simple auth-password2 }

The authentication user name and password are configured.


l

Run:
precinct-mode { local | remote }

The mode used to manage users in the SIP AP user group is configured.
l

Run:
register-uri-mode { inneruser | alone }

The registrar URI mode is configured.


l

Run:
subscribe ua-profile { enable

| disable

The mode used to initiate a UA profile subscription request is configured.


l

Run:
uri uri

A URI is configured.
l

Run:
endservice

Services of a specified user group are terminated.


----End

1.7.4 (Optional) Configuring Functions or Services in a SIP Service


Data Profile
This section describes how to configure functions or services in a SIP AG service data profile.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Applicable Environment
After a SIP AG user is configured, communication can be implemented. You can enable other
services for the SIP AG user according to user requirements.
Before configuring other services for a SIP AG user, run the service-right conf disable
command in the SIP AG service data profile to disable the call conference service.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sipservicedata sipaguser-name telephone-number

The SIP service data profile view is displayed.


Step 4 Configure the following functions or services in the SIP service data profile.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Function/Service

Command

Default Setting

Authentication user
name and password

auth username authusername password { cipher |


ha1 { cipher | simple authpassword1 } | simple authpassword2 }

No authentication user name


and password configured

Dial tone type

dial-tone { normal | special |


mwi }

Normal dial tone type

Dial-out mode for


Centrex users

centrex-dial { directly |
secondary }

Direct dialing

Centrex number

centrex-number centrexnumber

Empty

Centrex prefix

centrex-prefix centrex-prefix

No Centrex prefix configured

CFB forward-to number

service cfb cfbnum-value

No CFB forward-to number


configured

CFNR forward-to
number and timeout
interval

service cfnr cfnrnumtimevalue cfnrnum-value

No CFNR forward-to number


configured

CFO forward-to number

service cfo cfbnum-value

No CFO forward-to number


configured

CFU forward-to number

service cfu cfunum-value

No CFU forward-to number


configured

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Function/Service

Command

Default Setting

Hotline number

service hotline hotline-time


hotline-number

No hotline number configured

Anonymous call service

service-right anonymous-call
enable

disable

Call forwarding service

service-right call-diversion
enable

disable

Call hold service

service-right call-hold enable

enable

Call transfer service

service-right call-transfer
enable

disable

Call conference service

service-right conf enable

enable

Call waiting service

service-right cw enable

enable

Hotline service

service-right hotline enable

disable

Malicious call
identification (MCID)
service

service-right malicious-callidentification enable

disable

MWI service

service-right mwi enable

disable

Terminal portability
service

service-right terminalportability enable

disable

Three-party service

service-right three-party
enable

enable

MWI service mode

mwi-mode { deferred |
immediate | combine }

Deferred MWI service mode

UUS1 service

service-right uus1 enable

disable

UUS2 service

service-right uus2 enable

disable

UUS3 service

service-right uus3 enable

disable

----End

1.7.5 Checking the Configuration


Procedure
l

Run the display voice sipaguser [ sipaguser-name ] command to check the configuration
of the SIP AG user.

Run the display voice sipagusergroup sipag-interface-id [ usergroup-id ] command to


check information about user group.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Run the display voice sipservicedata sipag-user-name telephone-number command to


check service data in the SIP service data profile.

----End

1.8 (Optional) Configuring the BEST Service


The branch exchange for survivable telephony (BEST) service enables SIP AGs in enterprise
branches to manage local calls when communication with the headquarters voice server fails.

Applicable Environment
Many enterprises or organizations deploy IP phones in their branches and use SIP servers in
headquarters to control calls of remote branches in a centralized manner. When communication
between a branch and the headquarters fails, the call service and other voice services in the
branch are interrupted. The BEST service can be configured to solve this problem. When
communication between a branch SIP AG and the headquarters SIP server fails, the SIP AG in
the branch starts to manage local calls to ensure uninterrupted voice services in the branch. When
communication between the branch and headquarters is restored, the headquarters SIP server
controls all calls.
As shown in Figure 1-2, an AR router functions as a SIP AG and connects to an IMS network.
When communication with the IMS network fails, the router manages local calls.
Figure 1-2 BEST networking

IMS
Network

Eth1/0/0
port 2/0/0

SIPAG
port 2/0/2
port 2/0/1

POTS

IP Phone

FAX

CAUTION
After enabling the BEST service, you must restart the router for the service to take effect, which
will interrupt all services on the router. Therefore, confirm your operation before enabling the
BEST service.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the BEST service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the router to work in SIP AG mode

Configuring a SIP AG
NOTE

By default, a SIP AG uses the probe mode to detect a proxy server. The BEST service cannot be used
in probe mode; therefore, after creating a SIP AG, run the proxy-detect-mode command to set the
proxy detection mode to option or register.

Configuring SIP AG users


NOTE

The SIP AG bound to the BEST service must have user phone numbers configured.

Procedure
1.

Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


2.

Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


3.

Run:
best enable

The BEST service is enabled.


4.

Run:
quit

Return to the system view.


5.

Run:
quit

Return to the user view.


6.

Run:
save

The current configuration is saved.


7.

Run:
reboot

The router is restarted.


NOTE

The BEST service takes effect only after you save the configuration and restart the router.

8.

Configure a call prefix.


NOTE

l When configuring the BEST service, the call prefix is bound to the enterprise default and DN
set defaultdialplan configured by using the enterprise default dn-set defaultdialplan
command.

9.

Configure a SIP server in the PBX view.

10. In the voice view, run:


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

best probe mgid

A SIP AG is bound to the BEST service.

Checking the Configuration


l

Run the display voice best config command to check the BEST service configuration.

Run the display voice best probe command to check the SIP AG bound to the BEST service.

Run the display voice best status command to check the status of the BEST service.

1.9 Resetting a SIP AG


This section describes how to reset a SIP AG.

Applicable Environment
To make modified SIP AG parameters take effect, reset the SIP AG.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before resetting a SIP AG, complete the following task:
l

Configuring a SIP AG interface and a SIP AG user

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sipag sipag-interface-id

The SIP AG view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
reset

The SIP AG view is reset.

CAUTION
Exercise caution when you run this command because resetting a SIP AG interrupts running
services.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

1.10 Maintaining a SIP AG


This section describes how to maintain a SIP AG.

1.10.1 Clearing SIP AG Statistics


Context

CAUTION
The cleared SIP AG statistics cannot be restored. Exercise caution when you run reset
commands.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the reset sctp-association-statistics command in the SIP AG view to clear statistics about
SCTP associations on a SIP AG.
Step 2 Run the reset sctp-global-statistics command in the user view to clear global SCTP statistics.
----End

1.11 Configuration Examples


This section provides a SIPAG configuration example.

1.11.1 Example for Configuring a SIP AG


Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 1-3, the SIP AG is directly connected to user terminals and exchanges media
and signaling streams with the IMS network. The SIP AG connects to POTS users through the
4FXS1FXO board and connects to ISDN users through the 2BST board. Users connect to the
IMS through the SIP AG to use voice, data, and multimedia services.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Figure 1-3 SIP AG networking

IMS
Network

GE1/0/0
port 2/0/0

SIPAG
port 1/0/0
port 2/0/1

POTS

POTS

ISDN

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.

Configure the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode.

2.

Create SIP AG interface and set parameters for the SIP AG interface.

3.

Create SIP AG users and set parameters of SIP AG users.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l

Interface through which the SIP AG exchanges media and signaling streams with the IMS
network: GigabitEthernet1/0/0

IP address of GigabitEthernet1/0/0: 1.1.1.1/24

IP address and port number of the primary proxy server: 2.2.2.2/5060

SIP AG's ports directly connected to user terminals: port 2/0/0, port 2/0/1, and port 1/0/0

Phone numbers of user terminals connected to port 2/0/0, port 2/0/1, and port 1/0/0:
11111111, 11112222, and 11113333

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode and reboot the device.
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] voice
[Huawei-voice] service-mode sipag
The modification takes effect only after you save the data and reboot the devic
e. Are you sure to change the protocol configuration?(y/n)[n]:
y
[Huawei-voice] quit
[Huawei] quit

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

<Huawei> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? (y/n)[n]:y
It will take several minutes to save configuration file, please wait..........
..............
Configuration file had been saved successfully
Note: The configuration file will take effect after being activated
<Huawei> reboot
Info: The system is comparing the configuration, please wait.
System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

Step 2 Configure a SIP AG interface.


# Configure an IP address pool.
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip address 1.1.1.1 24
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

# Set the IP address pool for exchanging media and signaling streams.
[Huawei] voice
[Huawei-voice] voip-address signalling interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 1.1.1.1
[Huawei-voice] voip-address media interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 1.1.1.1

# Set parameters on the SIP AG interface.


[Huawei-voice] sipag 1
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]

signalling-addr 1.1.1.1 5060


media-addr 1.1.1.1
transfer udp
primary-proxy-addr static 2.2.2.2 5060
home-domain huawei.com
profile 1
quit

Step 3 Configure SIP AG users.


# Configure SIP AG users.
[Huawei-voice] sipaguser 1
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-1]
[Huawei-voice] sipaguser 2
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-2]
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-2]
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-2]
[Huawei-voice] sipaguser 3
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-3]
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-3]
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-3]

port 2/0/0
agid 1
base-telno 11111111
quit
port 2/0/1
agid 1
base-telno 11112222
quit
port 1/0/0
agid 1
base-telno 11113333
quit

# Reset the SIP AG.


[Huawei-voice] sipag 1
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1] reset
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
Note: Reset Sipag interface succeeds.

Step 4 Verify the configuration.


Then user terminals on the SIP AG can implement voice communication.
Run the display voice sipag [ sipag-interface-id { running | config } ] command to view detailed
information about the SIP AG.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice
<Huawei> display voice sipag 1 config
AGID
Dynamic signalling IP address name
Signalling IP
Signalling port
Dynamic media IP address name
Media IP
Transfer mode
Primary proxy IP 1
Primary proxy IP 2
Secondary proxy IP 1
Secondary proxy IP 2
Primary proxy port
Secondary proxy port
Primary proxy domain name
Secondary proxy domain name
Proxy address mode
Home domain name
SIP profile index
Service logic index
Server Address DHCP option
Description
AG domain name
Phone context
Register URI
Conference factory URI
Subscribe to UA profile
Subscribe to reg state
Subscribe to MWI
SDP negotiation mode
Mode of supporting proxy dual-homing
Proxy detection mode
Proxy refresh mode

1 SIPAG Configuration

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

1
1.1.1.1
5060
1.1.1.1
UDP
2.2.2.2
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
5060
65535
IP
huawei.com
1: Default
0: Default
0: None

Enable
Disable
Disable
Remote
Manual switch over
Probe

Run the display voice sipaguser [ sipaguser-name ] command to view detailed information
about the SIP AG users.
<Huawei> display voice sipaguser 1
Slotid/Subcard/Portid
: 2/0/0
AGID
:
Base telno
: 11111111
GroupID
:

----End

Configuration Files
Configuration file of the Router
#
voice
voip-address signalling interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0
1.1.1.1
voip-address media interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0
1.1.1.1
#
sipag 1
signalling-addr 1.1.1.1
5060
media-addr 1.1.1.1
primary-proxy-addr static 2.2.2.2
5060
home-domain huawei.com
#
sipaguser 1 port 2/0/0
base-telno 11111111
agid 1
#

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice
sipaguser 2
base-telno
agid 1
#
sipaguser 3
base-telno
agid 1

1 SIPAG Configuration

port 2/0/1
11112222
port 1/0/0
11113333

#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
return

1.11.2 Using a PRA Trunk to Connect the SIP AG to a PBX


Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 1-4, the Router functions as the SIP AG and uses a PRA trunk to connect
to user terminals connected to the PBX to transmit voice, data, and multimedia services. The
PBX can be an IP PBX (the AR router can work in PBX mode) or a digital stored program
control switch.
NOTE

The Router uses the 1E1T1-M board to connect to the PBX.

Figure 1-4 Using a PRA trunk to connect the SIP AG to a PBX

IMS
Network

GE1/0/0
Router
port 1/0/0
PRA trunk
PBX

POTS A

POTS B

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

1.

Configure the AR2200 to work in SIPAG mode on the Router.

2.

Configure the 1E1T1-M board to work in e1-voice mode.

3.

Create SIP AG interface and set parameters for the SIP AG interface on the Router.

4.

Create SIP AG users and set parameters of SIP AG users on the Router.

5.

Configure the trunk type on the PBX as PBX and use the PBX as the user-side device.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l

Interface through which the Router exchanges media and signaling streams with the IMS
network: GigabitEthernet1/0/0

IP address of GigabitEthernet1/0/0: 1.1.1.1/24

IP address and port number of the primary proxy server: 2.2.2.2/5060

Phone number of POTSA: 11111111

Phone number of POTSB: 11112222

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode on the Router and reboot the device.
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] sysname Router
[Router] voice
[Router-voice] service-mode sipag
The modification takes effect only after you save the data and reboot the devic
e. Are you sure to change the protocol configuration?(y/n)[n]:
y
[Router-voice] quit
[Router] quit
<Huawei> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? (y/n)[n]:y
It will take several minutes to save configuration file, please wait..........
..............
Configuration file had been saved successfully
Note: The configuration file will take effect after being activated
<Router> reboot
Info: The system is comparing the configuration, please wait.
System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

Step 2 Configure the 1E1T1-M board to work in e1-voice mode.


<Router> system-view
[Router] set workmode slot 1 e1t1 e1-voice
Changing the working mode will reset the board in slot 1. Continue? [y/n]:y
INFO: Resetting board[1] succeeded.

Step 3 Configure a SIP AG interface.


# Configure an IP address pool.
[Router] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[Router-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip address 1.1.1.1 24
[Router-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit

# Set the IP address pool for exchanging media and signaling streams.
[Router] voice
[Router-voice] voip-address signalling interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 1.1.1.1
[Router-voice] voip-address media interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 1.1.1.1

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

# Set parameters on the SIP AG interface.


[Router-voice] sipag 1
[Router-voice-sipag-1]
[Router-voice-sipag-1]
[Router-voice-sipag-1]
[Router-voice-sipag-1]
[Router-voice-sipag-1]
[Router-voice-sipag-1]
[Router-voice-sipag-1]

signalling-addr 1.1.1.1 5060


media-addr 1.1.1.1
transfer udp
primary-proxy-addr static 2.2.2.2 5060
home-domain huawei.com
profile 1
quit

Step 4 Configure SIP AG users.


# Configure SIP AG users.
[Router-voice] sipaguser 1
[Router-voice-sipaguser-1]
[Router-voice-sipaguser-1]
[Router-voice-sipaguser-1]
[Router-voice-sipaguser-1]

port 1/0/0
agid 1
extend-telno 11111111
extend-telno 11112222
quit

# Reset the SIP AG.


[Router-voice] sipag 1
[Router-voice-sipag-1] reset
[Router-voice-sipag-1]
Note: Reset Sipag interface succeeds.

Step 5 Configure the trunk type on the PBX as PBX and use the PBX as the user-side device.
The configurations on different types of PBXs are different, so the configuration procedure is
not mentioned here. If the AR is used as the PBX, see 2.12 Configuring a Trunk Group.
Step 6 Verify the configuration.
Then user terminals on the SIP AG can implement voice communication.
Run the display voice sipag [ sipag-interface-id { running | config } ] command to view detailed
information about the SIP AG.
<Router> display voice sipag 1 config
AGID
Dynamic signalling IP address name
Signalling IP
Signalling port
Dynamic media IP address name
Media IP
Transfer mode
Primary proxy IP 1
Primary proxy IP 2
Secondary proxy IP 1
Secondary proxy IP 2
Primary proxy port
Secondary proxy port
Primary proxy domain name
Secondary proxy domain name
Proxy address mode
Home domain name
SIP profile index
Service logic index
Server Address DHCP option
Description
AG domain name
Phone context
Register URI
Conference factory URI
Subscribe to UA profile
Subscribe to reg state
Subscribe to MWI

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

1
1.1.1.1
5060
1.1.1.1
UDP
2.2.2.2
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
5060
65535
IP
huawei.com
1: Default
0: Default
0: None

Enable
Disable
Disable

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

SDP negotiation mode


: Remote
Mode of supporting proxy dual-homing : Manual switch over
Proxy detection mode
: Probe
Proxy refresh mode
:

Run the display voice sipaguser [ sipaguser-name ] command to view detailed information
about the SIP AG users.
<Router> display voice sipaguser 1
Slotid/Subcard/Portid
: 1/0/0
AGID
: 1
Base telno
:
GroupID
:
Extend telno
: 11111111
GroupID
:
Extend telno
: 11112222
GroupID
:
Priority
: cat3
Uri report
: Disable
Auto limit
: 20
B channel 0
: normal
B channel 1
: normal
B channel 2
: normal
B channel 3
: normal
B channel 4
: normal
B channel 5
: normal
B channel 6
: normal
B channel 7
: normal
B channel 8
: normal
B channel 9
: normal
B channel 10
: normal
B channel 11
: normal
B channel 12
: normal
B channel 13
: normal
B channel 14
: normal
B channel 15
: normal
B channel 16
: normal
B channel 17
: normal
B channel 18
: normal
B channel 19
: normal
B channel 20
: normal
B channel 21
: normal
B channel 22
: normal
B channel 23
: normal
B channel 24
: normal
B channel 25
: normal
B channel 26
: normal
B channel 27
: normal
B channel 28
: normal
B channel 29
: normal
B channel 30
: normal
B channel 31
: normal

----End

Configuration Files
Configuration file of the Router
#
board add 0/1 1VE1-MFT
#
set workmode slot 2 e1t1 e1-voice
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

voip-address signalling interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0


1.1.1.1
voip-address media interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0
1.1.1.1
#
sipag 1
signalling-addr 1.1.1.1
5060
media-addr 1.1.1.1
primary-proxy-addr static 2.2.2.2
5060
home-domain huawei.com
#
sipaguser 1 port 1/0/0
agid 1
extend-telno 11111111
extend-telno 11112222
#
return

1.11.3 Example for Configuring the BEST Service


The BEST service enables voice gateways in enterprise branches to manage local calls when
communication with the headquarters voice server fails.

Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 1-5, the Router functions as a voice gateway and connects to an IMS
network. To ensure that the Router can manage local calls when communication with the IMS
network fails, configure the BEST service on the Router.
Figure 1-5 BEST networking

IMS
Network

GE1/0/0
port 2/0/0

SIPAG
port 2/0/2

Router

POTS
1000

POTS
1001

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1.

Configure the Router to work in SIP AG mode.

2.

Create a SIP AG and set parameters for the SIP AG interface.

3.

Set parameters of SIP AG users.

4.

Enable the BEST service.

5.

Configure a call prefix.

6.

Configure a SIP server.

7.

Bind the SIP AG to the BEST service.

1 SIPAG Configuration

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l

Interface through which the SIP AG exchanges media and signaling streams with the IMS
network: Ethernet1/0/0

IP address of Ethernet1/0/0: 10.10.1.171/24

IP address and port number of the primary proxy server for the SIP AG: 10.10.1.205, 5066

SIP AG's ports directly connected to user terminals: port2/0/0 and port2/0/1

Phone numbers of user terminals directly connected to port2/0/0 and port2/0/1 of the SIP
AG: 1000 and 1001

Media IP address of the SIP server: 192.168.1.3/24

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode.
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] voice
[Huawei-voice] service-mode sipag
The modification takes effect only after you save the data and reboot the device.
Are you sure to change the protocol configuration?(y/n)[n]:
y
[Huawei-voice] quit
[Huawei] quit
<Huawei> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? (y/n)[n]:y
It will take several minutes to save configuration file, please wait..........
..............
Configuration file had been saved successfully
Note: The configuration file will take effect after being activated
<Huawei> reboot
Info: The system is comparing the configuration, please wait.
System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

Step 2 Configure a SIP AG.


# Assign an IP addresses to the interface connected to the IMS network.
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] interface ethernet 1/0/0
[Huawei-Ethernet1/0/0] ip address 10.10.1.171 24
[Huawei-Ethernet1/0/0] quit

# Configure the signaling and media IP addresses.


[Huawei] voice
[Huawei-voice] voip-address signalling interface ethernet 1/0/0 10.10.1.171
[Huawei-voice] voip-address media interface ethernet 1/0/0 10.10.1.171

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

# Create a SIP AG and configure parameters for the SIP AG.


[Huawei-voice] sipag 1
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]

signalling-addr 10.10.1.171 5061


media-addr 10.10.1.171
primary-proxy-addr static 10.10.1.205 5066
home-domain huawei.com
proxy-detect-mode option
quit

Step 3 Configure SIP AG users.


# Configure SIP AG users.
[Huawei-voice] sipaguser 1000
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-1000]
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-1000]
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-1000]
[Huawei-voice] sipaguser 1001
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-1001]
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-1001]
[Huawei-voice-sipaguser-1001]

port 2/0/0
agid 1
base-telno 1000
quit
port 2/0/1
agid 1
base-telno 1001
quit

# Reset the SIP AG.


[Huawei-voice] sipag 1
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1] reset
Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]: y
[Huawei-voice-sipag-1]
Reset MG interface succeeds!

Step 4 Enable the BEST service.


[Huawei-voice] best enable
The modification takes effect only after you save the data and reboot the
device.
Are you sure to change the BEST configuration?(y/n)[n]:y
[Huawei-voice] quit
[Huawei] quit
<Huawei> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? (y/n)[n]:y
It will take several minutes to save configuration file, please wait..........
........
Configuration file had been saved successfully
Note: The configuration file will take effect after being activated
<Huawei> reboot
Info: The system is comparing the configuration, please wait.
System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

Step 5 Configure a call prefix.


<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] voice
[Huawei-voice] callprefix 1
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-1]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-1]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-1]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-1]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-1]

enterprise default dn-set defaultdialplan centrex prefix 1


call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 4 6
quit

Step 6 Configure a SIP server.


[Huawei-voice] sipserver
[Huawei-voice-sipserver]
[Huawei-voice-sipserver]
[Huawei-voice-sipserver]
[Huawei-voice-sipserver]
[Huawei-voice-sipserver]

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

signalling-address ip 10.10.1.171 port 5060


media-ip 10.10.1.171
register-uri huawei.com
home-domain huawei.com
reset

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

Are you sure to reset the SIP server?(y/n)[n]y


[Huawei-voice-sipserver] quit

Step 7 Bind the SIP AG to the BEST service.


[Huawei-voice] best probe 1
[Huawei] quit

Step 8 Verify the configuration.


Users connected to the SIP AG can communicate with each other.
Run the display voice best config command to check the BEST configuration. The following
information is displayed:
<Huawei> display voice best config
The BEST mode is enable.

Run the display voice best probe command to check the SIP AG bound to the BEST service.
The following information is displayed:
<Huawei> display voice best probe
The BEST probe mgid 1.

Run the display voice best status command to view the status of the BEST service. If the link
between the Router and the IMS network fails, the following information is displayed:
<Huawei> display voice best status
The BEST is running.

----End

Configuration Files
Configuration file of the Router
#
voice
voip-address signalling interface Ethernet 1/0/0 10.10.1.171
voip-address media interface Ethernet 1/0/0 10.10.1.171
best probe 1
#
sipserver
signalling-address ip 10.10.1.171 port 5060
media-ip 10.10.1.171
register-uri huawei.com
home-domain huawei.com
#
callprefix 1
enterprise default dn-set defaultdialplan
prefix 1
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 4 6
#
sipag 1
signalling-addr 10.10.1.171 5061
media-addr 10.10.1.171
primary-proxy-addr static 10.10.1.205 5066
home-domain huawei.com
proxy-detect-mode option
#
sipaguser 1000 port 2/0/0
#
sipaguser 1001 port 1/0/2
base-telno 1001
agid 1
#
sipaguser 10000 port 1/0/1

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

1 SIPAG Configuration

base-telno 1000
agid 1
#
return

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

PBX Configuration

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the concepts and configuration of the Private Branch Exchange (PBX),
and provides configuration examples.
2.1 PBX Overview
This section describes the concept of PBX and PBX-related terms.
2.2 PBX Features Supported by the AR2200
The AR2200 provides the following PBX features: SIP server, CDR server, trunk/trunk group,
call routing, individual services, and group services.
2.3 PBX Configuration Procedures
This section provides PBX configuration procedures.
2.4 (Optional) Setting Parameters for Voice Interfaces
This section describes how to set parameters for voice interfaces.
2.5 Setting PBX Parameters
This section describes how to set PBX parameters.
2.6 Configuring an Enterprise
After an enterprise is created, you can configure the Centrex group, prefix, and DN set.
2.7 Configuring a Call Prefix
A call prefix is located at the beginning of a called number.
2.8 Configuring a PBX User
A user identifier includes the user number and DN set.
2.9 (Optional) Configuring a SIP Server
A SIP server is the main component of the IP PBX and establishes SIP sessions.
2.10 (Optional)Configuring SBC Proxy Function
This section describes how to configure the SBC proxy function to implement voice services
for SIPUEs.
2.11 (Optional)Configuring a CDR Server
The call detail record (CDR) of users can be queried in real time, and the CDR data can be
analyzed by using a third-party tool so that users can quickly know call fees.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.12 Configuring a Trunk Group


A trunk group is associated with a call route to enable users from different exchange offices to
call each other.
2.13 Configuring a Call Route
A call route is associated with a trunk group to enable users from different offices to call each
other.
2.14 (Optional)Configuring Individualized PBX Services
The AR2200 supports multiple individualized PBX services.
2.15 (Optional) Configuring Group Services on the PBX
When functioning as a PBX, the AR2200 supports various individual services. You can
configure services for individual users as required.
2.16 Configuration Examples
This section provides a PBX configuration example.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.1 PBX Overview


This section describes the concept of PBX and PBX-related terms.

Introduction
A traditional private branch exchange (PBX) manages incoming and outgoing calls of an
enterprise. It connects the enterprise to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) and
provides services for devices such as telephones, fax machines, and modems. It allows users in
the enterprise to call each other using extension phones and routes inter-office calls to the PSTN
through a trunk line.
Traditional PBXs cannot meet requirements for computer telephony integration (CTI) and voice
over IP (VoIP). In addition, these PBXs are expensive and do not use standard and open
platforms, bringing difficulties in interconnection between PBXs of different vendors. IP PBXs
overcome the limitations of traditional PBXs. IP PBXs are based on the IP protocol and provide
the local exchange and IP user access functions. IP PBXs integrate the voice communications
system of an enterprise into the enterprise's data network so that the enterprise can build a uniform
voice and data network connecting branches offices and staff around the world.
The AR2200 can function as a PBX to provide traditional PBX functions and IP PBX functions.
NOTE

l The AR2200 series routers support the voice features only after a DSP module is installed.
l To provide voice services for POTS users, 4FXS/1FXO board is required.
l To provide voice services for ISDN users, 2BST board is required.

Terms
l

DN set
A dial number (DN) set defines a group of numbers that are processed in the same way.
A DN set, a country code, and an area code identify the home area of a user; a DN set and
a call prefix determine the dialing plan for a user. DN sets divide a physical network or a
device into multiple logical networks.

Centrex and enterprise


A central office exchange service (Centrex) group is a group of users on a PBX or users
connected to PBXs in different areas. The same service is provided for users in the same
Centrex group are provided the same service.
Each user in a Centrex group has two numbers, a private number and a long number. Users
in a Centrex group use private numbers to call each other by default. A user in the Centrex
group must dial the call prefix when calling a user out of the Centrex group. When
configuring or modifying attributes of Centrex users, you must specify the Centrex number.
An enterprise has one or more Centrex groups. Each Centrex group belongs to only one
enterprise. Users in an enterprise may belong to a Centrex group or not belong to any
Centrex group.
Centrex groups and enterprises identify users at the service layer, whereas DN sets identify
users at the switching layer.

Call prefix
A call prefix, an important attribute of the call service, defines a call number rule and
describes the call number distribution and routing plans in an exchange office. A call prefix

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

identifies the service attribute (basic service or supplementary service; intra-office call,
national toll call, or international toll call) of a dialing plan and determines the range of
dialed number length. Call prefixes can also be used to control call permissions.
A PBX checks validity of a dialed number and connects or rejects the call based on the call
prefix. A call can be connected correctly only if the call matches the correct call prefix.
Therefore, proper call prefix configuration is the key to the call service. A call must match
at least one call prefix.
l

Trunk and trunk group


A trunk is a logical link between two exchange offices. Inter-office calls must be transmitted
by trunks. The AR2200 supports the following trunks: AT0, PRA, SIP, H323, and E1R2.
A trunk group is a set of trunks for inter-office calls with same attributes.

Call route
A call route binds an inter-office call prefix to a trunk group so that calls with the specified
call prefix are transmitted on the specified trunk line.

IMS
The IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (IMS) is an architectural framework for
providing IP multimedia services, including audio, video, text, and instant messages. It was
designed by the wireless standards body 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) in
Release 5.

SIP
SIP is an IETF-defined signaling protocol and runs at the control layer of the IMS. As an
application layer protocol, SIP establishes, modifies, or terminates multimedia sessions and
works with protocols such as the Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP), Real-Time Transport
Control Protocol (RTCP), Session Description Protocol (SDP), Real-time Stream Protocol
(RTSP), Domain Name System (DNS), Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP),
and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to complete session setup and media negotiation.

H323
H.323 is a recommendation from the ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector
(ITU-T) that defines the protocols to provide audio-visual communication sessions on
computer networks. H.323 initiates and terminates multimedia sessions, and can
dynamically change session attributes, including the required bandwidth, media type,
media encoding format, and support for broadcast.

PSTN user
PSTN users are Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) users.

SIP UE
SIP user equipment (SIP UE) is a user device that connects to a PBX using the SIP protocol,
for example, an IP phone or a software terminal. SIP UEs connect to a PBX through the IP
network and obtain services from the PBX after registering on the PBX.

2.2 PBX Features Supported by the AR2200


The AR2200 provides the following PBX features: SIP server, CDR server, trunk/trunk group,
call routing, individual services, and group services.

SIP Server
If SIP users need to communicate with each other through the AR2200, configure a SIP server
on the AR2200.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

SBC Proxy
If employees on a business trip use private network IP addresses, the SIPUEs cannot properly
connect to the PBX at the enterprise's headquarters. If employees within the enterprise use private
network IP addresses, they cannot call an external number through the SIP trunk. To solve this
problem, the SBC proxy function needs to be configured on AR2200.

CDR Server
Call detail records (CDRs) are details about calls recorded in real time. You can use a third-party
tool to analyze CDRs of calls and obtain call fees of users. To record and view CDRs of users,
specify a CDR server on the AR2200.

Trunk and Trunk Group


Inter-office calls are transmitted by trunk lines. The AR2200 supports the following types of
trunks:
l

PRA trunk
A PRA trunk is connected to a VE1 interface and is usually used to connect two PBXs.

AT0 trunk
An AT0 trunk is connected to a foreign exchange office (FXO) interface and is used only
to connect to the upstream PSTN network.

SIP trunk
A SIP trunk is established on an IP link and connects a PBX and an IMS. There are two
types of SIP trunks: SIP AT0 trunk and common SIP trunk.

E1R2 trunk
The E1R2 trunk is bound to VE1 interfaces and is usually used to connect two PBXs. The
E1R2 trunk can be connected to a peer device using R2 signaling.

H323 trunk
An H323 trunk is established on an IP link. It connects a PBX and an IMS or connects
PBXs in different areas.

Trunks for inter-office calls with the same attributes are added to a trunk group. A trunk group
is associated with a call route to establish call sessions between exchange offices.

Call Route
A call route is bound to a trunk group to determine the trunk line for a specified call prefix. To
allow users to make inter-office calls, configure call routes.

Individual services

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Service Type

Description

Abbreviated dialing

Allows a user to dial an abbreviated code of


one or two digits instead of the original called
number.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

2 PBX Configuration

Service Type

Description

Outgoing call barring

Restricts call-out permissions of some


phones. For example, the outgoing call
barring service can prevent a phone from
making long-distance calls.

Call forwarding

Allows a called user to transfer a call to a


specified third party if the called user has
activated the call forwarding service and the
call meets the call forwarding conditions.

Number barring

Prevents a user from dialing a specified


number.

Do-not-disturb

Rejects calls to a user. When other users call


a user that has subscribed to the do-notdisturb service, they hear a do-not-disturb
tone or busy tone.

Reject anonymous call

Allows a user to reject a call when the calling


number is not displayed and plays a voice
prompt to the calling user.

Remote office

Allows a user to access the office telephone


network from any terminal and use original
services such as abbreviated dialing and call
transfer.

Secretary

Allows a user to designate another phone


number (for example, the secretary's phone
number) to process all incoming calls. That
is, all incoming calls of the user are
transferred to the secretary's phone number
first, and only the secretary can call the user
directly.

Wake-up service

Allows a phone to ring automatically at the


preset time.

Personal ring back tone (RBT)

Uses user-defined music or sound effects to


replace the common ringback tone, and plays
the music or sound effects to calling users.

Selective call rejection

Filters every incoming call against a list of


rejected calling numbers created by a user and
rejects calls made by numbers on the list.

Selective call acceptance

Filters every incoming call against a list of


calling numbers created by a user and accepts
calls from only the numbers on the list.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Group services

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Service Type

Description

Call interception

Provides a voice prompt when a call fails to


be connected. The user can learn about the
failure cause and determine whether to redial
the called number according to the voice
prompt.

Distinctive ringing

Plays different ring tones to users based on


the prefix analysis result (local calls, national
calls, international calls, and intra-Centrex
calls).

Enterprise RBT

Uses music or sound effects made by an


enterprise to replace the common ringback
tone, and plays the music or sound effects to
calling users.

Interactive voice response (IVR)

Provides the automated attendant function


and allows enterprises to make their own IVR
menus and voice prompts, improving user
experience.

Number change

Hides calling numbers or displays the same


calling number for all outgoing calls.

Pre-routing number change

Provides various dialing modes and changes


the calling number displayed on the called
party's phone.

Post-routing number change

Provides various dialing modes and changes


the calling number displayed on the called
party's phone. A post-routing number change
plan can change a called number to a long
number to ensure that it complies with the
required number format.

PBX line selection

When a calling party dials the access number


of a PBX group, the system uses the
configured line selection mode to connect the
call to a user in the group.

Co-group pickup

Allows users in the same group to answer


calls for each other on their own phones. For
example, when the phone of user A rings, user
B in the same group can dial the service
access code plus user A's phone number to
answer the call.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Service Type

Description

Simultaneous ringing

When a calling party dials the access number


of a simultaneous ringing group, all member
phones in the group ring simultaneously, and
the called party can answer the call using any
ringing phone.

Sequential ringing

When a calling party dials the access number


of a sequential ringing group, member phones
in the group ring in the configured sequence.

One number link you (ONLY)

When the calling party calls ONLY number


of the called party, multiple terminals of the
called party ring according to the configured
rules, and the called party can select one
terminal to answer the incoming call.

License Support
The PBX function is used with a license. To use the PBX function, apply for and purchase the
following license from Huawei local office:
Table 2-1 PBX licenses
License Name

Depends on

Remarks
This license has the following functions:

CM&BEST License

Value-added
service package
for voice services

l Implements intra-office calls.


l Works with a trunk to implement inter-office
call; however, either the calling or called
party must be a local user.
l Provides all services except IVR navigation.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

CT (Call Trunk)
License

Value-added
service package
for voice services

This license implements inter-office trunk


connections. All the interfaces on a device are
trunk interfaces, which cannot connect to IP
phones or analog phones.

IVR (Interactive
Voice Response)
License

CM&BEST
License or CT
(Call Trunk)
license

This license implements the IVR navigation


function.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

NOTE

l The PBX function is controlled by the CM&BEST, CT, and IVR licenses. For the functions provided
by each license, see the Remarks column in the preceding table.
l For the dependent licenses of the PBX function, see the Depends on column in the preceding table.
For example, the CM&BEST License depends on the value-added service package for voice services;
therefore, to use the CM function, load the value-added service package for voice services first.
l If a function has multiple capacity licenses, select one or multiple licenses. Multiple licenses can be
used together.

2.3 PBX Configuration Procedures


This section provides PBX configuration procedures.
The PBX configuration procedure differs in intra-office call and inter-office call scenarios.

PBX Configuration for Intra-Office Calls


As shown in Figure 2-1, the PBX only needs to process calls between users connected to the
PBX.
Figure 2-1 Networking of intra-office calls

PBX

FXS1/0/0

User A

FXS1/0/1

SIPUE

User B

Figure 2-2 shows the configuration flowchart for intra-office calls. After mandatory
configurations are complete, users can call each other.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-2 Configuration flowchart for intra-office calls


Start

Set voice interface


parameters

(Optional) Set parameters of FXS,


FXO, BRA, and VE1 ports

Configure global
PBX parameters

Configure global PBX parameters

Configure an
enterprise

Configure enterprise, Centrex group,


and DN set.

Configure a call
prefix

Configure a call prefix

Configure PBX
users

Configure the device identifier and


user identifier for each PBX user

Configure a SIP
server

(Optional) Skip this step when there


is no SIP user

Configure a CDR
server

(Optional) Skip this step when CDRs


do not need to be recorded

Configure
individual services

(Optional) Configure individual


services as required

Configure group
services

(Optional) Configure group services


as required

End

PBX Configuration for Inter-Office Calls


As shown in Figure 2-3, user A in the headquarters needs to call user B in the branch. The
outgoing call needs to be connected through a trunk line.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-3 Networking of inter-office calls

Branch

User B

AR
Enterprise A
SIP
PSTN

IP
SIP

AT0

AR
Headquarters
PBX

Enterprise A

User A

Figure 2-4 shows the configuration flowchart for inter-office calls. After mandatory
configurations are complete, users in the headquarters and branch can call each other.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-4 Configuration flowchart for inter-office calls


Start

Set voice interface


parameters

(Optional) Set parameters of FXS,


FXO, BRA, and VE1 interfaces

Configure global
PBX parameters

Configure global PBX parameters

Configure an
enterprise

Configure enterprise, Centrex group,


and DN set

Configure a call
prefix

Configure a call prefix

Configure PBX
users

Configure the device identifier and


user identifier for each PBX user

Configure a trunk
group

Create a trunk group and add trunks


to the group

Configure call
routes

Configure call attributes, validity


period, and trunk circuit selection
mode for each call route

Configure a SIP
server

(Optional) Skip this step when there


is no SIP user

Configure SBC
proxy

(Optional) Configure the SBC proxy


function

Configure a CDR
server

(Optional) Skip this step when CDRs


do not need to be recorded

Configure
individual services

(Optional) Configure individual


services as required

Configure group
services

(Optional) Configure group services


as required

End

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.4 (Optional) Setting Parameters for Voice Interfaces


This section describes how to set parameters for voice interfaces.

2.4.1 Setting Parameters for an FXS Interface


This section describes how to set parameters for an FXS interface.

Applicable Environment
An FXS interface connects to a POTS phone. To achieve high transmission efficiency on an
FXS interface, properly set parameters for the FXS interface on the AR2200, including physical
attributes, electrical attributes, and KC attributes.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting parameters for an FXS interface, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Ensuring that the voice 4FXS1FXO board is working properly

Data Preparation
To set parameters for an FXS interface, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Polarity reversal pulse level width, polarity reversal mode, and dialing mode

Current, impedance, send gain, and receive gain

High-level pulse width, low-level pulse width, KC accounting mode, and voltage
operating

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
port fxs slotid/subcardid/portid

The FXS interface view is displayed.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 4 Set physical attributes for the FXS interface.


l Run:
reverse-pole-pulse enable

The polarity reversal pulse function is enabled.


l Run:
reverse-pole-pulse level level-value

The polarity reversal pulse level width is set.


l Run:
polarity-reverse-mode { hard

| soft }

The polarity reversal mode is set.


l Run:
clip-reverse-pole-pulse enable

The CLIP polarity reversal pulse function is enabled.


l Run:
dial-mode { dtmf | pulse | both }

The dialing mode is set.


l Run:
line-lock enable

Port locking is enabled.


l Run:
nlp-mode { disable | normal | ec-gain-adjust | enhance | reduce }

The non-linear processing (NLP) mode is set.


Step 5 Set electrical attributes for the FXS interface.
l Run:
electric current current-value

The current is set.


l Run:
electric impedance impedance-value

The impedance is set.


l Run:
electric send-gain sendgain-value

The send gain is set.


l Run:
electric receive-gain recvgain-value

The receive gain is set.


Step 6 Set KC attributes for the FXS interface.
l Run:
kc high-level highlevel

The high-level pulse width is set.


l Run:
kc low-level lowlevel

The low-level pulse width is set.


l Run:
kc type { 16kc | 12kc }

The KC accounting mode is set.


l Run:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

kc voltage voltage

The voltage operating is set.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice port fxs [ state ] [ slotid/subcardid/portid ] command to check the FXS
interface configuration.

2.4.2 Setting Parameters for an FXO Interface


This section describes how to set parameters for an FXO interface.

Applicable Environment
An FXO interface connects to a PSTN. To achieve high transmission efficiency on an FXO
interface, properly set parameters for the FXO interface on the AR2200, including the gain,
impedance, ring current, and feed.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting parameters for an FXO interface, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Ensuring that the voice 4FXS1FXO board is working properly

Data Preparation
To set parameters for an FXO interface, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Gain, impedance, ring current, and feed

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
port fxo slotid/subcardid/portid

The FXO interface view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
gain { send sendgain-value | receive recvgain-value }

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The gain is set.


NOTE

If the RBT played for the caller through the FXO port is too loud, the FXO port may fail to detect the busy
tone from the caller; therefore, if the caller hangs up before the call is answered, the called user still hears
the ring tone for a period. This problem can be solved by adjusting the send gain on the FXO interface.

Step 5 Run:
impedance { DC value

| AC value }

The impedance is set.


Step 6 Run:
ring { minimum-duration min-duration-value | maximum-interval max-interval-value |
frequence frequence-value | AC-amplitude AC-amplitude | offset offset-value }

The ring current is set.


Step 7 Run:
feed { maximum-voltage max-vol-value | minimum-voltage min-vol-value | maximumcurrent max-current-value | minimum-current min-current-value }

The feed is set.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice port fxo [ state ] [ slotid/subcardid/portid ] command to check the FXO
interface configuration.

2.4.3 Setting parameters for a BRA Interface


This section describes how to set parameters for a BRA interface.

Applicable Environment
A basic rate access (BRA) interface connects to an ISDN phone. On the AR2200, you can enable
the BRA interface Layer 2 monitoring, remote power supply, automatic deactivation, and alarm
functions, and set the working mode and Layer 1 activation mode on a BRA interface.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting parameters for a BRA interface, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Ensuring that the 2BST board is working properly

Data Preparation
To set parameters for a BRA interface, you need the following data.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

No.

Data

Interface working mode, automatic deactivation delay, and Layer 1 activation mode

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
port bra slotid/subcardid/portid

The BRA interface view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
l2-monitor enable

BRA interface Layer 2 monitoring is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
work-mode { p2p | p2mp }

The working mode is set.


Step 6 Run:
remote-power enable

Remote power supply is enabled.


Step 7 Run:
auto-deactive enable

Automatic deactivation is enabled.


Step 8 Run:
auto-deactive delay delay

The automatic deactivation delay is set.


Step 9 Run:
active-mode { unstable | stable }

The Layer 1 activation mode is set.


Step 10 Run:
alarm enable

The alarm function is enabled.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice port bra [ state ] [ slotid/subcardid/portid ] command to check the BRA
interface configuration.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.4.4 Setting Parameters for a PRA Interface


This section describes how to set parameters for a PRA interface.

Applicable Environment
A PRA interface connects to a PBX or PSTN network. On the AR2200, you can enable the
CRC4 check, E1 interface Layer 2 monitoring, and E1 interface pulse code modulation (PCM)
alarm functions, and set the CRC alarm threshold and E1 interface signaling mode on a PRA
interface.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting parameters for a PRA interface, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Ensuring that the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M board is working properly

Data Preparation
To set parameters for a PRA interface, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Access digital section mode

CRC alarm threshold and signaling mode of the E1 interface

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
set workmode slot slot-id

e1t1 e1-voice

The E1 interface board is configured as an E1 voice card.


Step 3 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
port ve1 slotid/subcardid/portid

The PRA interface view is displayed.


Step 5 Run:
access-mode { digital | direct }

The access digital section mode is set.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 6 Run:
crc4 enable

CRC4 check is enabled.


Step 7 Run:
crc-alarm-threshold { es es-threshold | cses cses-threshold | dm dm- threshold }

The CRC alarm threshold is set.


Step 8 Run:
l2-monitor enable

E1 interface Layer 2 monitoring is enabled.


Step 9 Run:
pcm-alarm

The PCM alarm function is enabled.


Step 10 Run:
signal { CCS | CAS }

The signaling mode is set.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice port ve1 [ state ] [ slotid/subcardid/portid ] command to check the PRA
interface configuration.

2.5 Setting PBX Parameters


This section describes how to set PBX parameters.

2.5.1 Configuring the AR2200 to Work in PBX Mode


Applicable Environment
You can configure the AR2200 to work in SIP AG or PBX mode. Before configuring PBX
service features, configure the AR2200 to work in PBX mode. You can run the display voice
service-mode command to view the working mode of the AR2200. If the AR2200 works in SIP
AG mode, delete the SIP AG configurations and configure the AR2200 to work in PBX mode.
If the AR2200 works in PBX mode, skip this configuration.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode, complete the following task:
l
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Configuring IP addresses and routing protocols for interfaces to ensure connectivity


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
service-mode pbx

The AR2200 is configured to work in PBX mode.


Step 4 Run:
quit

Return to the system view.


Step 5 Run:
quit

Return to the user view.


Step 6 Run:
save

The configuration is saved.


Step 7 Run:
reboot

The AR2200 is restarted.


NOTE

After the AR2200 is configured to work in PBX mode, restart the AR2200 to make the configuration take
effect.

----End

Checking the Configuration


After the configuration is complete, the AR2200 works in PBX mode.
Run the display voice service-mode command to check the working mode of the AR2200.
<Huawei> display voice service-mode
The voice service mode is PBX

2.5.2 Configuring Media and Signaling IP Address Pools


Media and signaling IP address pools provide media and signaling IP addresses for SIP AG
interfaces.

Context
A SIP AG interface must obtain media and signaling IP addresses from media and signaling IP
address pools respectively. The signaling IP address pool stores IP addresses of PBX interfaces
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

and the media IP address pool stores IP addresses of media streams. Media streams and signaling
streams can use the same IP address. Media and signaling IP addresses must be available and
routes are reachable.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
voip-address media interface interface-type interface-number { ip-address |
dynamic }

A media IP address pool is configured.


Step 4 Run:
voip-address signalling interface interface-type interface-number { ip-address |
dynamic }

A signaling IP address pool is configured.


----End

2.5.3 (Optional) Setting System Parameters


This section describes how to set system parameters.

Establishing the Configuration Task


Applicable Environment
Different countries and regions use different voice parameter standards; therefore, set voice
parameters on the SIP AG in accordance with local standards.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting PBX parameters, complete the following task:
l

Configuring IP addresses and routing protocols for interfaces to ensure connectivity

Data Preparation
To set PBX parameters, you need the following data.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

No.

Data

Country/Region identifier
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

No.

Data

Country code

Area code of national toll calls

Lower threshold and upper threshold for hookflash pressing

MWI mode

Codec mode for voice services

AC amplitude of the ringing current, frequency of the ringing current, and cadence
ratio

CLIP parameters in offhook state:


l Interval between the time when the ACK message is received and the time when
the FSK is transmitted
l Maximum duration between the time when the DT-AS is transmitted and the time
when the ACK message is received
l Duration of the DT-AS
l Level of the DT-AS
l Level of the FSK
l Number of bits of the FSK synchronization mask

CLIP parameters in onhook state:


l Number of bits seized by a channel
l Duration of the DT-AS
l Interval between the time when the DT-AS is transmitted and the time when the
FSK is transmitted
l Level of the DT-AS
l Level of the FSK
l Number of bits of the FSK synchronization mask

10

Maximum uplink bandwidth and reserved bandwidth for emergency calls

Configuring a Country/Region Identifier


This section describes how to configure a country/region identifier.

Applicable Environment
A country/region identifier is configured on a SIP AG so that user terminals connect to the SIP
AG can comply with the local standard.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
country { brazil | britain-msfuk | britain-etsi | bulgaria | china-hongkong
china-mainland | egypt | france | singapore | thailand }

A country/region identifier is configured.


By default, a country/region identifier is China mainland.
----End

Configuring a Country/Region Code


Context
Before configuring a country/region code, run the display voice country-code command to
view the pre-configured country/region codes on the AR2200.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
country-code country-code-value [ country-name country-name | international-prefix
international-prefix-value | national-prefix national-prefix-value ]*

A country/region code is configured.


NOTE

The AR does not support the user-defined country code and region code. If the user-defined country code
and region code are used, communication may fail.
To configure the prefix of an international toll call, specify international-prefix international-prefixvalue.
To configure the prefix of a national toll call, specify national-prefix national-prefix-value.

Step 4 Run:
pbx { default-country-code dcc-value | default-area-code dac-value }*

The default country/region is configured.


----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Configuring the Area Code of Toll Calls


Context
Before configuring the area code of toll calls, run the display voice country-code country-codevalue command to view the pre-configured area codes.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
area-code country-code-value area-code-value [ area-name area-name-value ]

The area code of toll calls is configured.


----End

Setting Upper and Lower Thresholds for Hookflash Pressing


The upper and lower thresholds for hookflash pressing determine the hookflash duration.

Context
Hookflash or flash is a button on a telephone that simulates quickly hanging up and then picking
up again (a quick off-hook/on-hook/off-hook cycle). The hookflash can be pressed by a calling
party or a called party:
l

Hookflash pressed by a called party: If the called party user A wants to transfer an incoming
call to user B, user A can press the hookflash and dial the number of user B.

Hookflash pressed by a calling party: User A calls user B. User B answers the call and talks
with user A. User A can press the hookflash and dial the number of user C after hearing a
special dial tone.

After user A presses the hookflash:


l

If user C is busy, user A can press the hookflash and talk with user B.

If user C does not respond for a long period of time, user A can press the hookflash and
talk with user B.

If the phone of user C rings, user A hangs up and user B hears the ringback tone. User C
picks up the phone and talks with user B.

Whether a called party can be transferred to a toll call is restricted by the outgoing right of
the called party.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
flash-hook lower lower-value

The lower threshold for hookflash pressing is set.


By default, the lower threshold for hookflash pressing is 100 ms.
Step 4 Run:
flash-hook upper upper-value

The upper threshold for hookflash pressing is set.


By default, the upper threshold for hookflash pressing is 350 ms.
NOTE

The lower threshold for hookflash pressing must be 50 ms less than the upper threshold for hookflash
pressing.

----End

Setting the MWI Mode


You need to set the MWI mode according to user habits.

Context
If there are leave messages, the user device configured with the MWI function makes the
indicator on or plays a tone, indicating that there are leave messages. You can set the MWI mode
according to user habits.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
mwi-mode { fsk-with-ring | fsk-without-ring | high-voltage }

The MWI mode is set.


----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Configuring the Codec Mode for Voice Services


You need to configure the codec mode for voice services so that the user device can work in
compliance with the local standard.

Context
G.711, also known as Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), is a commonly used waveform codec. G.
711 defines two main compression algorithms, the -law algorithm (used in North America &
Japan) and A-law algorithm (used in Europe and China). A-law encoding takes a 13-bit signed
linear audio sample as input. -law encoding takes a 15-bit signed linear audio sample as input.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pcm { a-law | u-law }

The codec mode is configured for voice services.


----End

Setting Ringing Parameters


You can set the AC amplitude of the ringing current, frequency of the ringing current, cadence
ratio, and initial ringing function on the AR2200 to meet local standards.

Context
Different countries and regions use different ringing standards. You can set the AC amplitude
of the ringing current to adjust the ringing tone volume, voice pitch, cadence ratio, and initial
ringing function on the AR2200 to meet local standards.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run the following command according to user requirements.
l
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Run:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

ring frequency { 16hz | 25hz | 50hz }

The frequency of the ringing current is set.


l

Run:
user-defined-ring ring-index { first-ring first-ring-period | first-interval
first-interval | second-ring second-ring-period | second-interval secondinterval | third-ring third-ring-period | third-interval third-interval }*

The cadence ratio of a specified user-defined ring type is set.


l

Run:
stop-initial-ring { enable | disable }

The initial ringing function is enabled.


----End

Enabling the Function That Reduces the Feed on Locked Ports


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
park-feed enable

The function that reduces the feed on locked ports is enabled.


This function takes effect for only FXS ports.
----End

Setting CLIP Parameters in Offhook State


You can set CLIP parameters in offhook state on the AR2200 so that the AR2200 can work with
the phone terminal.

Context
When the CLIP service is registered, CLIP parameters in offhook state need to be configured
on the AR2200 so that the AR2200 can work with the phone terminal. Generally, default
parameter settings are used. If CLIP parameters are not set properly, change relevant CLIP
parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
clip offhook ack-fsk-interval ack-fsk-interval

The interval between the time when the ACK message is received and the time when the
frequency-shift keying (FSK) is transmitted in offhook state is set.
l

Run:
clip offhook dtas-ack-interval dtas-ack-interval

The maximum duration between the time when the dual tone-alerting signal (DT-AS) is
transmitted and the time when the ACK message is received in offhook state is set.
l

Run:
clip offhook dtas-duration dtas-dur-value

The duration of the dual tone-alerting signal (DT-AS) in offhook state is set.
l

Run:
clip offhook dtas-level dtas-level

The level of the DT-AS in offhook state is configured.


l

Run:
clip offhook fsk-level fsk-level

The level of the FSK in offhook state is configured.


l

Run:
clip offhook mark-signal-bit mark-signal-bit

The number of bits of the FSK synchronization mask in offhook state is set.
----End

Setting CLIP Parameters in Onhook State


You can set CLIP parameters in onhook state on the AR2200 so that the AR2200 can work with
the phone terminal.

Context
When the CLIP service is registered, CLIP parameters in onhook state need to be configured on
the AR2200 so that the AR2200 can work with the phone terminal. Generally, default parameter
settings are used. If CLIP parameters are not set properly, change relevant CLIP parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
clip onhook channel-seize-bit channel-seize-bit

The number of bits seized by a channel in onhook state is set.


l

Run:
clip onhook dtas-duration dtas-dur-value

The duration of the DT-AS in onhook state is set.


l

Run:
clip onhook dtas-fsk-interval dtas-fsk-interval

The interval between the time when the DT-AS is transmitted and the time when the FSK
is transmitted in onhook state is set.
l

Run:
clip onhook dtas-level dtas-level

The level of the DT-AS in onhook state is configured.


l

Run:
clip onhook fsk-level fsk-level

The level of the FSK in onhook state is configured.


l

Run:
clip onhook mark-signal-bit marksignal-bit

The number of bits of the FSK synchronization mask in onhook state is set.
----End

Setting Uplink Bandwidth Parameters


This section describes how to set uplink bandwidth parameters.

Context
The AR2200 provides uplink bandwidth control. When the system detects that the uplink
bandwidth usage reaches the configured upper threshold, it restricts calls and generates an alarm.
If the uplink bandwidth is insufficient, the system processes calls based on user levels. Common
users may not obtain services.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run the following commands as required.
l
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Run:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

media-bandwidth-control enable

The AR2200 is enabled to restrict calls when the uplink bandwidth is enabled.
l

Run:
media-bandwidth-control maximum max-bandwidth

The maximum uplink bandwidth is set.


l

Run:
media-bandwidth-control reserved-for-emergency reserved-bandwidth

The reserved bandwidth is set for emergency calls.


NOTE

The reserved bandwidth for emergency calls must be smaller than the maximum uplink bandwidth
configured by the media-bandwidth-control maximum command.

----End

Checking the Configuration


After the configuration of system parameters is complete, you can view the system parameters
such as the SIP interface's IP address, upper and lower thresholds for hookflash pressing, and
CLIP parameters.

Procedure
l

Run the display voice configuration command to check the voice configuration.

Run the display voice user-defined-ring [ring-index ] command to check user-defined


ring information.

Run the display voice clip command to check CLIP parameters.

Run the display voice sip-reg-count-per-second command to check the number of SIP
Register messages initiated per second.

----End

2.5.4 (Optional) Setting SIP Stack Parameters


This section describes how to set SIP stack parameters.

Establishing the Configuration Task


Before setting SIP stack parameters, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
SIP is an IETF-defined signaling protocol widely used for controlling communication sessions
such as voice and video calls over Internet Protocol (IP). SIP, RTP, RTCP, RTSP, and other
protocols constitute a SIP protocol stack.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting SIP protocol stack parameters, complete the following task:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Configuring the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode

Configuring IP addresses and routing protocols for interfaces to ensure connectivity

Data Preparation
To set SIP protocol stack parameters, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Minimum value of the session timer, value of the unreliable provisional


response retransmission timer, value of the reliable provisional response
retransmission timer, value of the T1 timer, value of the T2 timer, value of the
T4 timer, and value of the TD timer

Values of the Max-forwards field, Organization header field, Server header


field, and User-Agent header field

Setting the Values of Timers


This section describes how to set values of timers of the SIP stack.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sip

The SIP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
entity-based-sessions-timer enable

The session timer defined by RFC 4028 based on the UA is defined.


l

Run:
min-se min-seperiod

The minimum value of the session timer is set.


l

Run:
session-progress session-progressperiod

The value of the unreliable provisional response retransmission timer is set.


l

Run:
session-rel-progress session-rel-progressperiod

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The value of the reliable provisional response retransmission timer is set.


l

Run:
t1 t1period

The value of the T1 timer is set.


l

Run:
t2 t2period

The value of the T2 timer is set.


l

Run:
t4 t4period

The value of the T4 timer is set.


l

Run:
td tdperiod

The value of the TD timer is set.


----End

Setting Values of Header Fields


This section describes how to set values of header fields.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sip

The SIP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
header-folding enable

Header folding in the authentication header field is enabled.


l

Run:
field-header max-forwards max-forwards-value

The value of the Max-forwards header field is set.


l

Run:
field-header organization organization-head

The value of the Organization header field is set.


l

Run:
field-header server server-head

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The value of the Server header field is set.


l

Run:
field-header user-agent user-agent-head

The value of the User-agent header field is set.


----End

Checking the Configuration


After the configuration is complete, you can view the configured SIP stack parameters.

Procedure
l

Run the display voice sip command to check SIP parameters.

----End

2.5.5 (Optional) Setting DSP Parameters


This section describes how to set DSP parameters.

Establishing the Configuration Task


Before setting DSP parameters, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete
the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This will help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
The digital signal processing (DSP) collects, converts, filters, measures, enhances, compresses,
or identifies signals and coverts the signal from an analog to a digital form.
The DSP module converts analog voice signals into digital signals and stores a certain number
of digital signals into packets for transmission. To improve the voice communication quality,
the DSP needs to further process voice signals.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before setting DSP parameters, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in SIP AG mode

Configuring IP addresses and routing protocols for interfaces to ensure connectivity

Data Preparation
To set DSP parameters, you need the following data.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

No.

Data

VBD switching mode

Default DSP channel code type and default interval at which the DSP channel
packetizes RTP packets
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

No.

Data

T.30 redundancy parameter value of the T.38 fax, T.4 redundancy parameter value
of the T.38 fax, fax training mode, and maximum fax training rate

Alarm threshold of the dynamic jitter buffer, initial value of the dynamic jitter buffer,
maximum value of the dynamic jitter buffer, maximum value of the static jitter buffer,
minimum value of the dynamic jitter buffer, minimum value of the static jitter buffer,
and initial value of the static jitter buffer of a DSP channel

RTP payload type value, G.726-16k payload type value, G.726-24k payload type
value, G.726-32k payload type value, G.726-40k payload type value, NTE payload
type value, redundancy payload type value, and VBD payload value of a DSP channel

Interval at which a DSP channel sends RTCP packets and threshold for the number
of severe degrade seconds

Resource threshold in hierarchical control mode

Data event transmission mode, special process, DTMF transmission mode, echo
cancellation function, input gain, output gain, jitter buffer mode, NLP mode, and DSP
working mode in a DSP template

DSP loopback type and DSP channel parameters

Enabling Echo Cancellation on a DSP Channel


This section describes how to enable echo cancellation on a DSP channel.

Context
A user may hear the user's echo in the phone receiver in a conversation. If a proper delay in the
transmitted or received signal is set, the echo can be removed. If the delay exceeds 25 ms, the
voice quality deteriorates and the conversation ends. You can enable echo cancellation on a DSP
channel to remove echoes.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
echo enable

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Echo cancellation is enabled on the DSP channel.


----End

Enabling the PLC Function on a DSP Channel


This section describes how to enable the packet loss concealment (PLC) function on a DSP
channel.

Context
PLC is a technique that masks the effects of packet loss in VoIP communications. PLC is
effective only when the packet loss ratio is low. During communication, the average packet loss
ratio may be low, but a high burst packet loss ratio results in severe voice quality deterioration.
PLC can insert a static frame in the place where a packet is lost, regenerate a packet received
prior to the lost one, or generate an analog voice packet. If packets are lost during communication
and PLC is not used, the voice communication is interrupted. You can use a proper PLC
algorithm to minimize effects of packet losses.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
plc enable

The PLC function is enabled on the DSP channel.


----End

Enabling Silence Compression on a DSP Channel


You can enable silence compression on a DSP channel to reduce the number of sent voice
packets.

Context
To save network bandwidth, enable silence compression on a DSP channel. When no voice is
detected, the encoder generates short silence codes, but does not generate voice compression
codes. In addition, the encoder notifies the receiver of silence start until the voice is restored.
The silence compression function reduces the number of sent voice packets.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
silence enable

Silence compression is enabled on the DSP channel.


----End

Setting the VBD Switching Mode


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
autovbd { auto | host-controlled }

The VBD switching mode is configured.


NOTE

By default, the VBD switching mode is host-controlled.

----End

Setting Fax Parameters


This section describes how to set fax parameters.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Set fax parameters.
l

Run:
fax redundancy-t4 redundancy-t4value

The T.4 redundancy parameter value of the T.38 fax is set.


l

Run:
fax redundancy-t30 redundancy-t30value

The T.30 redundancy parameter value of the T.38 fax is set.


l

Run:
fax training-mode { e2e | local }

The fax training mode is set.


l

Run:
fax training-rate { v17 | v29 | v27 }

The maximum fax training rate is set.


l

Run:
fax v8negotiate enable

V8 negotiation is enabled.
----End

Setting Jitter Buffer Parameters


This section describes how to set jitter buffer parameters to improve the voice quality.

Context
Delay variations in voice packet arrival time can occur because of network congestion or route
changes. To reduce sound distortion caused by the delay jitter and packet loss, a jitter buffer is
used. You can set proper jitter buffer parameters to minimize delay variations so that packets
can be processed in a timely manner and smooth voice communication can be provided as much
as possible.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Set parameters for the Jitter Buffer.
l

Run:
jitter-buffer adapt-jb-threshold adapt-jb-threshold

The alarm threshold of the dynamic jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer init-adapt-jb init-adapt-jb-value

The initial value of the dynamic jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer init-fixed-jb normal-fixed-jb-value

The initial value of the static jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer max-adapt-jb max-adapt-jb-value

The maximum value of the dynamic jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer min-adapt-jb min-adapt-jb-value

The minimum value of the dynamic jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer max-fixed-jb max-fixed-jb-value

The maximum value of the static jitter buffer is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer min-fixed-jb min-fixed-jb-value

The minimum value of the static jitter buffer is set.


----End

Setting the Payload Type Value


This section describes how to set the payload type value.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Set Payload Type parameters.
NOTE

The following payload type values must be different.

Run:
payload-type clear-mode clearmode-value

The RTP payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type g726-16k g726-16k-value

The G.726-16k payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type g726-24k g726-24k-value

The G.726-24k payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type g726-32k g726-32k-value

The G.726-32k payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type g726-40k g726-40k-value

The G.726-40k payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type nte nte-value

The NTE payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type redundancy redundancy-value

The redundancy payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


l

Run:
payload-type vbd vbd-value

The VBD payload type value of a DSP channel is set.


----End

Setting RTCP Parameters


This section describes how to set RTP control protocol (RTCP) parameters.

Context
RTCP monitors the quality of service and conveys information about participants in an on-going
session. RTCP periodically sends packets to all the participants in the session to monitor the
quality of service and obtain identity information about the participants.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
rtcp rtcp-interval rtcp-interval

The interval at which a DSP channel sends RTCP packets is set.


l

Run:
rtcp rtcpxr enable

The RTP Control Protocol Extended Reports (RTCP XR) function is enabled.
l

Run:
rtcp sev-degradethreshold sev-degradethresholdval

The threshold for the number of severe degrade seconds is set.


l

Run:
rtcp vqm enable

The Voice Quality Monitor (VQM) function is enabled.


----End

Setting DSP Resource Parameters


This section describes how to set DSP resource parameters.

Context
DSP resources are limited and users have different requirements for DSP resources. To control
and allocate DSP resources properly, set the DSP resource control mode and the resource
threshold in hierarchical control mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
resource-threshold mode { priority | normal }

The DSP resource control mode is configured.


l

Run:
resource-threshold { threshold1 threshold1 | threshold2 threshold2 |
threshold3 threshold3 }

The resource threshold in hierarchical control mode is set.


The resource threshold in hierarchical control mode can be set only when the DSP resource
control mode is priority.
----End

Configuring a DSP Template


This section describes how to configure a DSP template.

Context
To customize DSP parameters for data services, configure a DSP template. After a DSP template
is configured, specify the template for users according to the port and phone number. The DSP
template improves the call connection rate. After a template is specified successfully, parameters
in the DSP template take effect immediately.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp-attribute

The DSP view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
template name

A DSP template is created.


Step 5 Set parameters in the DSP template.
l
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Run:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

data-event data-event-value

The data event transmission mode is configured.


l

Run:
dsp-special-flow dsp-special-flow-value

A special process is configured.


l

Run:
dtmf dtmf-value

The Dual-Tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) transmission mode is configured.


l

Run:
echo-cancel { enable | disable }

The echo cancellation function is enabled or disabled.


l

Run:
input-gain input-gain-value

The input gain is set.


l

Run:
output-gain output-gain-value

The output gain is set.


l

Run:
jitter-buffer { dynamic | static }

The jitter buffer mode is configured.


l

Run:
nlp nlp-value

The normal link pulse (NLP) transmission mode is configured.


l

Run:
work-mode work-mode-value

The DSP working mode is configured.


l

Run:
vbd redundancy

Voice band data (VBD) redundancy transmission is enabled.


----End

Configuring a DSP Channel


This section describes how to configure a DSP channel.

Context
You can enable a digital signal processor (DSP) channel to work in loopback mode, and set the
loopback mode (PCM-side loopback test and IP-side loopback test). When the DSP channel
between the calling party and called party cannot transmit signals or can transmit signals only
in one direction, run the loop-back command to locate the fault. If the calling party hears the
echo in a PCM-side loopback test, the speech channel between the calling phone and the calling
DSP channel is functioning properly. If the called party hears the echo in an IP-side loopback
test, the speech channel between the called phone and the calling DSP channel is functioning
properly.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

To control resources of DSP channels, prohibit the DSP channels. The prohibited DSP channels
cannot participate in resource allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
dsp slot/dsp-index

The DSP resource management view is displayed.


Step 4 Run the following commands as required.
l

Run:
loop-back loopback-type channel

The loopback function is configured on a DSP channel.


l

Run:
prohibit channel [ count ]

DSP channels are prohibited.


----End

Checking the Configuration


After the configuration of DSP parameters is complete, you can view the DSP parameters
including fax parameters and jitter buffer parameters.

Procedure
l

Run the display voice dsp-attribute command to check the DSP configuration.

Run the display voice dsp state { slot/dsp-index | channel slot/dsp-index/channel }


command to check the status of a DSP or DSP channel.

Run the display voice dsp-template command to check the DSP template configuration.

----End

2.6 Configuring an Enterprise


After an enterprise is created, you can configure the Centrex group, prefix, and DN set.

Applicable Environment
When multiple enterprises access a PBX, the PBX can be divided into multiple virtual PBXs so
that the enterprises can use one PBX. Configuring enterprises on the PBX facilitate user
management.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring an enterprise, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Data Preparation
To configure an enterprise, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Enterprise name

(Optional) Centrex group

DN set

(Optional) Ring delay

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
enterprise enterprise-name

An enterprise is created and the enterprise view is displayed.


By default, the enterprise default exists on the AR2200.
Step 4 Run:
centrex centrex-name [ description description ]

A Centrex group is created.


By default, no Centrex group is configured for an enterprise.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
centrex-amount centrex-amount-value

By default, a maximum of 16 Centrex groups can be configured in the enterprise view for
different devices
l AR2220: 16
l AR2240: 32
Step 6 Run:
dn-set dn-set-name [ description description ]

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

A DN set is configured.
By default, the default DN set defaultdialplan is generated after an enterprise is created.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
description enterprise-name

The description of the enterprise is configured.


By default, no description is configured for an enterprise.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice enterprise [ enterprise-name ] command to check the enterprise
configuration.

2.7 Configuring a Call Prefix


A call prefix is located at the beginning of a called number.

Usage Scenario
A call prefix, an important attribute of the call service, defines a call number rule and describes
the call number distribution and routing plans in an exchange office.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a call prefix, complete the following task:
l

Configuring an enterprise

Data Preparation
To configure a call prefix, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Call prefix profile name, enterprise and dial number (DN) set to be bound to the call
prefix, call type, call attribute, maximum length and minimum length of a number
that can be parsed, (optional) home area attribute, and (optional) ringing delay

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
callprefix callprefix-name

A call prefix profile is created and its view is displayed.


By default, no call prefix profile is configured.
Step 4 Run:
prefix prefix

A call prefix is configured.


Step 5 Run:
enterprise enterprise-name [ dn-set dn-set-name ] [ centrex centrex-name ]

An enterprise, Centrex group, and DN set are bound to a call prefix.


By default, no enterprise, Centrex group, or DN set is bound to a call prefix.
Step 6 Run:
call-type category callcategory attribute attribute

The call type and call attribute are configured for the call prefix.
By default, no call type or call attribute is configured for a call prefix.
Step 7 Run:
digit-length maximum-length-value minimum-length-value

The length of a number that can be parsed is set.


By default, the length of a number that can be parsed is not set.
NOTE

The maximum length of a number that can be parsed must be greater than or equal to the minimum length
of a number that can be parsed.

Step 8 (Optional) Run:


destination-location { intra-office | inter-office }

The home area attribute of the call prefix is configured.


By default, the home area attribute of a call prefix is intra-office.
Step 9 (Optional) Run:
ring-delay ringdelay-value

The ringing delay is configured.


By default, the ringing delay is 0s.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice callprefix [ callprefix-name ] command to check the call prefix
configuration.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.8 Configuring a PBX User


A user identifier includes the user number and DN set.

Usage Scenario
When a user is needed for the voice service, you need to create a PBX user on the PBX.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a PBX user, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the device to work in PBX mode

Setting global PBX parameters

Configuring an enterprise

Data Preparation
To configure an enterprise, you need the following data.
No.

Data

User name

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name [ msn-sub | { pots | sipue | bra } [ enterprise enterprise-name ] ]

A PBX user is created and the PBX user view is displayed.


By default, no PBX user is configured.
Step 4 Run the following commands to configure a port or device ID for the PBX user.
l

Run the port slotid/subcard/portid command to configure a port for the PBX user.

Run the sipue eid-value command to configure a device ID for the SIP UE user.

Step 5 Run:
telno [ country-code country-code-value ] [ area-code area-code-value ] telno-value

The country code, area code, and telephone number of the PBX user are configured.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

By default, no country code, area code, or telephone number is configured for a PBX user.
Step 6 Run:
dn-set dn-set-name

A DN set is bound to the PBX user identifier.


By default, no DN set is configured for a PBX user.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
centrex centrex-name centrex-telno-value

The Centrex group that the PBX user belongs to is configured.


By default, no Centrex group is configured.
Step 8 (Optional) Run:
call-right { in in-right-value | out out-right-value }*

The incoming and outgoing call rights are configured.


By default:
l Incoming call: Only intra-office users can make calls to intra-office users.
l Outgoing call: Only intra-office users can receive calls from intra-office users.
Step 9 (Optional) Run:
user-type type

The user type is configured.


By default, users are common users.
Step 10 (Optional) Run:
user-status status

The user service status is configured.


By default, the user service status is correct.
Step 11 (Optional) Run:
eid-para description description

The description of the PBX user is configured.


By default, no description is configured for a PBX user.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice pbxuser command to check the configuration of the PBX user.

2.9 (Optional) Configuring a SIP Server


A SIP server is the main component of the IP PBX and establishes SIP sessions.

Usage Scenario
If SIP users need to communicate with each other through the AR2200, configure a SIP server.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a SIP server, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Setting global PBX parameters

Configuring an enterprise

Assigning IP addresses to interfaces

Data Preparation
To configure a SIP server, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Signaling IP address and signaling port number of the SIP server

Media IP address of the SIP server

Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of the SIP server

Home domain of the SIP server

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sipserver

The SIP server view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
signaling-address{ ip ip-address | addr-name addr-name-value } port port-value

A signaling IP address and signaling port number are configured for the SIP server.
By default, no signaling IP address or signaling port number is configured.
Step 5 Run:
signalling-domain signaling-domain-value

The signaling domain name is configured for the SIP server using a dynamic signaling IP address.
NOTE

When a SIP server uses a dynamic signaling IP address, configure a signaling domain name for the SIP
server.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 6 Run:
ddns-client ddns-client-name

A dynamic domain name system (DDNS) name is configured for a SIP server using a dynamic
signaling IP address.
NOTE

When a SIP server uses a dynamic signaling IP address, configure a DDNS client name for the SIP server so
that the DDNS server can update the mapping between the signaling domain name and IP address.

Step 7 Run:
media-ip { ip-address | addr-name addr-name-value }

The media IP address of the SIP server is configured.


By default, no media IP address of the SIP server is configured.
Step 8 Run:
register-uri uri

The URI of the SIP server is configured.


By default, the URI of the SIP server is not configured.
Step 9 Run:
home-domain domain

A home domain that the SIP server belongs to is configured.


By default, no home domain is configured.
Step 10 Run:
reset

The SIP server is reset.

CAUTION
Exercise caution when you run this command because resetting a SIP server interrupts running
services.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice sipserver command to check the SIP server configuration.

2.10 (Optional)Configuring SBC Proxy Function


This section describes how to configure the SBC proxy function to implement voice services
for SIPUEs.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.10.1 Configuring the SBC Proxy Function (Public IP Address for


the SIP Server and Private IP Addresses for SIPUEs)
This section describes how to configure the SBC proxy function to implement voice services
for SIPUEs when the SIP server uses a public IP address and the SIPUEs use private IP addresses.

Applicable Environment
As shown in Figure 2-5, the SIP server (router A) at the headquarters uses a public IP address,
and traveling SIPUEs and some SIPUEs in the branch use private IP addresses. To provide voice
services through the PBX at the headquarters for SIPUEs, the SBC proxy function must be
configured on router A.
Figure 2-5 SBC proxy configuration networking diagram (public IP address for the SIP server
and private IP addresses for SIPUEs)

Branch

SIP UE
Enterprise A

Router C
SIP trunk

Router B

ISDN
IP network

SIP UE
(Travelling staff)

SIP trunk
Router D
Router A

Headquarters

User A
Enterprise A

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the SBC proxy function, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the SIP server

Configuring the SIP trunk group

Configuring IP addresses to enable SIPUEs and SIP servers to communicate with each
other

Data Preparation
To configure the SBC proxy function, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Media trunk type, and signaling and media proxy policies for the SIP server

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sbc media-relay interface interface-type interface-number relay-type

The media relay interface and relay type are configured.


Step 4 Run:
sipserver

The SIP server view is displayed.


Step 5 Run:
sbc signalling-proxy value

The signaling proxy policy for the SIP server is configured.


NOTE

If all SIPUEs are located on the private network, set the value to Enable. If only some of the SIPUEs are located
on the private network, set the value to Auto.

Step 6 Run:
sbc media-proxy value

The media proxy policy for the SIP server is configured.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

NOTE

If all SIPUEs are located on the private network, set the value to Enable. If only some of the SIPUEs are located
on the private network, set the value to Auto.

----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice sipserver command to check the SIP server configuration.

2.10.2 Configuring the SBC Proxy Function (Private IP Address for


the SIP Server and Public IP Addresses for SIP UEs)
This section describes how to configure the SBC proxy function to implement voice services
for SIP UEs when the SIP server uses a private IP address and the SIP UEs use public IP
addresses.

Usage Scenario
As shown in Figure 2-6, the SIP server (router B) at the headquarters uses a private IP address,
and SIP UEs in the branch or on business trips use private IP addresses. The SBC proxy function
must be configured for the SIP server to provide voice services using the PBX at the headquarters
for SIP UEs.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-6 SBC proxy configuration networking diagram (private IP address for the SIP server
and public IP addresses for SIP UEs)

Headquarters

SIP UE
Enterpeise A

Router B
SIP trunk
ISDN

Router A

IP network

SIP UE
(Travelling staff)

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the SBC proxy function, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the SIP server

Configuring the SIP trunk group

Configuring SIP UEs

Configuring IP addresses to enable SIP UEs and SIP servers to communicate with each
other

Data Preparation
To configure the SBC proxy function, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

No.

Data

Media trunk type, and signaling and media proxy policies for the SIP server

Mapping public signaling and media IP addresses of the SIP server

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sbc media-relay interface interface-type interface-number relay-type

The media relay interface and relay type are configured.


Step 4 Run:
sipserver

The SIP server view is displayed.


Step 5 Run:
sbc signalling-proxy value

The signaling proxy policy for the SIP server is configured.


NOTE

If all SIP UEs are located on the private network, set the value to Enable. If only some of the SIP UEs are located
on the private network, set the value to Auto.

Step 6 Run:
sbc media-proxy value

The media proxy policy for the SIP server is configured.


NOTE

If all SIP UEs are located on the private network, set the value to Enable. If only some of the SIP UEs are located
on the private network, set the value to Auto.

Step 7 Run:
sbc mapped-signalling-address ip ip-address port port-value

A public IP address and port number are configured for signaling mapping of the SIP server.
Step 8 Run:
sbc mapped-media-ip ip-address

The public media IP address mapping the SIP server is configured.


----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice sipserver command to check the SIP server configuration.

2.10.3 Configuring the SBC Proxy Function (Private IP Address for


the SIP Server and Private IP Addresses for SIP UEs)
This section describes how to configure the SBC proxy function to implement voice services
for SIP UEs when the SIP server uses a private IP address and the SIP UEs use private IP
addresses.

Usage Scenario
As shown in Figure 2-7, the SIP server (router A) at the headquarters uses a private IP address,
and SIP UEs in the branch or on business trips use private IP addresses. To provide voice services
through the PBX at the headquarters for SIP UEs, the SBC proxy function must be configured
on router A.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-7 SBC proxy configuration networking diagram (private IP address for the SIP server
and private IP addresses for SIP UEs)

Branch

SIP UE
Enterpeise A

Router C
SIP trunk

Router B

IP network

Headquarters

Router A

SIP trunk

Enterpeise A

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the SBC proxy function, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the SIP server

Configuring the SIP trunk group

Configuring SIP UEs

Configuring IP addresses to enable SIP UEs and SIP servers to communicate with each
other

Data Preparation
To configure the SBC proxy function, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

No.

Data

Media proxy port number, media trunk type, and signaling and media proxy policies
for the SIP server

Mapping public signaling and media IP addresses of the SIP server

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
sbc media-relay interface interface-type interface-number relay-type

The media relay interface and relay type are configured.


Step 4 Configure the SBC proxy function for the SIP server.
l Run:
sipserver

The SIP server view is displayed.


l Run:
sbc signalling-proxy value

The signaling proxy policy is configured.


NOTE

If all SIP UEs are located on the private network, set the value to Enable. If only some of the SIP UEs are
located on the private network, set the value to Auto.

l Run:
sbc media-proxy value

The media proxy policy is configured.


NOTE

If all SIP UEs are located on the private network, set the value to Enable. If only some of the SIP UEs are
located on the private network, set the value to Auto.

l Run:
sbc mapped-signalling-address ip ip-address port port-value

A public IP address and port number are configured for signaling mapping of the SIP server.
l Run:
sbc mapped-media-ip port-value

The public media IP address mapping the SIP server is configured.


l Run:
sbc mapped-media-port-start port-value

The media port number mapping the SIP server is configured.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

l Run:
sbc mapped-media-proxy-port-start port-value

The media proxy port number mapping the SIP server is configured.
l Run:
return

The user view is displayed.


Step 5 Configure the SBC proxy function for the SIP trunk group.
l Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


l Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


l Run:
trunk-group name

The trunk group view is displayed.


l Run:
sbc media-proxy value

The media proxy policy is configured.


NOTE

If all SIP UEs are located on the private network, set the value to Enable. If only some of the SIP UEs are
located on the private network, set the value to Auto.

l Run:
sbc mapped-signalling-address ip ip-address port port-value

A public IP address and port number are configured for signaling mapping of the SIP server.
l Run:
sbc mapped-media-ip ip-address

The public media IP address mapping the SIP trunk group is configured.
l Run:
sbc mapped-media-port-start port-value

The media start port number mapping the SIP trunk group is configured.
l Run:
sbc mapped-media-proxy-port-start port-value

The media proxy start port number mapping the SIP trunk group is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice sipserver command to check the SIP server configuration.

2.11 (Optional)Configuring a CDR Server


The call detail record (CDR) of users can be queried in real time, and the CDR data can be
analyzed by using a third-party tool so that users can quickly know call fees.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Applicable Environment
To record and display CDRs of users, specify a CDR server on the AR2200.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a CDR server, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Assigning IP addresses to interfaces

Data Preparation
To configure a CDR server, you need the following data.
No.

Data

IP address and port number of the CDR server

User name and password

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
cdr-server

The CDR server view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
server ip ip-address server-port port-number

The IP address and port number of the CDR server are specified.
By default, no IP address or port number is configured for a CDR server.
Step 5 Run:
username username password { cipher cipher-password | simple simple-password}

The user name and password of the CDR server is configured.


By default, no user name or password of the CDR server is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice cdr-server command to check the CDR server configuration.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.12 Configuring a Trunk Group


A trunk group is associated with a call route to enable users from different exchange offices to
call each other.

2.12.1 Establishing the Configuration Task


Before configuring a trunk group, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Usage Scenario
As shown in Figure 2-8, the AR2200 functions as a PBX and needs to communicate with other
PBXs or external networks. The AR2200 supports the following connection modes:
l

Connects to a PSTN network through an AT0 trunk.

Connects to a PSTN network through a PRA trunk.

Connects to an IMS network through a SIP trunk.

Connects to another PBX through a PRA trunk.

Connects to another PBX through a E1R2 trunk.

Connects to another PBX through a SIP trunk.

Connects to an IMS network through an H323 trunk.

Connects to another PBX through an H323 trunk.

Trunks for inter-office calls with the same attributes are added to a trunk group. A trunk group
is associated with a call route to establish call sessions between exchange offices.
Figure 2-8 Trunk application

PSTN

IMS

SIP/H323

AT0/PRA
AR
SIP/PRA/E1R2/H323

PBX

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a trunk group, complete the following tasks:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring an enterprise

2 PBX Configuration

Data Preparation
To configure a trunk group, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Common parameters of a trunk group: trunk group name, signaling type, DN set and
enterprise to be bound to the trunk group, and optional parameters including the callin right, call-out right, country code, area code, default number displayed, trunk
circuit selection mode, and trunk group description
Parameters of a SIP trunk group: SIP registration mode, home domain of the peer
SIP trunk, signaling IP address or dynamic signaling IP address name of the SIP trunk
group, media IP address or dynamic media IP address name of the SIP server,
signaling port of the local end, IP address and port of the remote end, registrar
Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), and optional parameters including the
authentication password, trunk group identifier, maximum number of concurrent
calls, transmission mode, numeral software parameter and its index, Dual-Tone
Multi-frequency (DTMF) parameters, fax/modem codec negotiation mode,
packetization interval, voice band data (VBD) attribute type, VBD codec mode, VBD
payload type, modem transmission mode, RFC 2198 negotiation start mode, RFC
2198 redundancy transmission start mode, RFC 2833 negotiation start mode, and
RFC 2833 fax and modem transmission
Parameter of a PRA trunk group: protocol used

Parameters of a SIP AT0 trunk: ID and password for registration, trunk name, called
number of incoming calls, and calling number of outgoing calls
Parameters of an AT0 trunk: trunk name, location of the Foreign Exchange Office
(FXO) interface connected to the trunk, signal transmission type for the calling line
identification presentation (CLIP) service, dial delay, call prefix, dial delay after the
call prefix is inserted, called number of incoming calls, dialing mode, and trunk status
Parameters of a PRA trunk: trunk name, and location of the physical interface
connected to the trunk
Parameters of a PRA trunk: trunk name and member interfaces in the PRA trunk
Parameters of an E1R2 trunk: R2 signaling type, sending parameter of R2 line
signaling and register signaling, receiving parameter of R2 line signaling and register
signaling, line signaling and register signaling of R2 profile, register's receiving
address of R2 profile, signaling profile name of E1R2, and multiple-language
adaptive signaling of R2 profile

2.12.2 Configuring a Trunk Group


Creating a Trunk Group

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Context
When the signaling type of a trunk group is dss1-net, dss1-user, qsig-net, or qsig-user, the trunk
group is a PRA trunk group.
When the signaling type of a trunk group is FXO, the trunk group is an AT0 trunk group.
When the signaling type of a trunk group is SIP, the trunk group is a SIP trunk group.
When the signaling type of a trunk group is e1-r2, the trunk group is an E1R2 trunk group.
When the signaling type of a trunk group is H323, the trunk group is an H323 trunk group.
In PBX mode:
l

When the AR2200 functions as a network-side device and uses DSS1 signaling to connect
to the remote network through a PRA trunk, set the signaling type to dss1-net.

When the AR2200 functions as a user-side device and uses DSS1 signaling to connect to
the remote network through a PRA trunk, set the signaling type to dss1-user.

When the AR2200 functions as a network-side device and uses QSIG signaling to connect
to the remote network through a PRA trunk, set the signaling type to qsig-net.

When the AR2200 functions as a user-side device and uses QSIG signaling to connect to
the remote network through a PRA trunk, set the signaling type to qsig-user.

When the AR2200 connects to the remote network through an AT0 trunk, set the signaling
type to FXO.

When the AR2200 connects to the remote network through a SIP trunk, set the signaling
type to SIP.

If the AR2200 uses R2 signaling to connect to a network through the PRA trunk and is used
as a user-side device, the signaling type is set to e1-r2.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
trunk-group name [ dss1-net | dss1-user | fxo | h323 h323-trunktype-value | qsignet | qsig-user | e1-r2 | sip register-mode ];

A trunk group is created and the trunk group view is displayed.


----End

Configuring Common Parameters of a Trunk Group


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
trunk-group name

A trunk group is created and the trunk group view is displayed.


Step 4 Set mandatory parameters for the trunk group.
l Run:
enterprise enterprise-name [ dn-set dn-set-name ]

An enterprise and a DN set are bound to the trunk group.


Step 5 Set optional parameters for the trunk group.
l Run:
select-mode selectmode-value

The trunk circuit selection mode is configured.


l Run:
call-right

{ in in-right-value | out out-right-value }

The incoming and outgoing call rights are configured for the trunk group.
l Run:
default-caller-telno country-code-value area-code-value value

The country code, area code, and default number displayed are configured for the trunk group.
l Run:
description desc-value

The description of the trunk group is configured.


----End

Setting Parameters for a PRA Trunk Group


Context
When the trunk group type is PRA, perform the following operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
trunk-group name

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

A trunk group is created and the trunk group view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
pra standard pra-standard-value

The protocol type is specified for the PRA trunk.


----End

Setting Parameters for a SIP Trunk Group


Context
When the trunk group type is SIP, perform the following operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
trunk-group name

A trunk group is created and the trunk group view is displayed.


Step 4 Set mandatory parameters for SIP trunks.
l Run:
mgc-type maxcr-value

The adaptation type of a SIP trunk group is configured.


l Run:
home-domain value

The home domain to which the SIP trunk of the peer device belongs is configured.
l Run:
signalling-address { ip ip-address | addr-name signal-addr-name-value } port
port-value

A signaling IP address and port number are configured for the SIP trunk group.
l Run:
media-ip {ip-address | addr-name addr-name-value}

The media IP address or dynamic media IP address name is configured for the SIP server.
l Run:
peer-address static primary-ip-value primary-port-value [ secondary
ip-value secondary-port-value ]

secondary-

The remote IP address and port are configured for the SIP trunk group.
l Run:
register-uri register-uri-value

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The registrar URI is configured.


l Run:
register-id register-uri-value password { simple password-value | cipher
password-value }

A trunk group ID and an authentication password are configured.


NOTE

The trunk authentication password and trunk group identifier need to be configured only when the SIP
trunk registration mode is trunk group registration.

Step 5 Set optional parameters for the SIP trunk group.


l Run:
maxcr maxcr-value

The maximum number of concurrent calls is set.


l Run:
transfer maxcr-value

The transmission mode is set.


l Run:
number-parameter numpara-no numpara-value

The numeral software parameter and numeral software parameter index are set.
l Run:
dtmf-transmission-mode { thoroughly | erase }

Dual-Tone Multi-frequency parameters are set.


l Run:
fax-modem common negotiation-mode { negotiate | self-switch }

The fax/modem codec negotiation mode is set.


l Run:
fax-modem common rtp-interval { 5ms | 10ms | 20ms | 30ms }

The packetization interval in transparent transmission mode is set.


l Run:
fax-modem common bd-attribute-type { chinatelecom | extchinatelecom | ietf |
v152 }

The VBD attribute type is set.


l Run:
fax-modem common vbd-codec { g711a | g711u }

The VBD codec mode is set.


l Run:
fax-modem common vbd-payload-type { dynamic | static }

The VBD payload type is set.


l Run:
fax-modem modem transmission-mode { thoroughly | relay }

The modem transmission mode is set.


l Run:
redundancy-negotiation-mode { negotiation | fixed-start | no-initiative-start }

The mode in which RFC 2198 redundancy transmission negotiation is started is set.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

l Run:
redundancy-start-mode { ordinary2198 | smart2198 }

The mode in which RFC 2198 redundancy transmission is started is set.


l Run:
redundancy-vbd enable

The PBX is enabled to transmit VBD using RFC 2198 redundancy transmission.
l Run:
nte-flashhook enable

RFC 2833 hookflash event transmission is enabled.


l Run:
nte-negotiation-mode { negostart | fixedstart | no-initiative-start }

The mode in which RFC 2833 transmission negotiation is started is set.


l Run:
nte-fax-modem enable

RFC 2833 fax and modem transmission is enabled.


----End

Setting Parameters for an H323 Trunk Group


Context
When an H323 trunk is used, the AR2200 can function as the gatekeeper and gateway and is
used in the following scenarios:
l

Peer mode
As shown in Figure 2-9, RouterA and RouterB are enterprise routers that can communicate.
Voice services between RouterA and RouterB are transmitted through the H323 trunk. The
H323 trunk uses the peer mode, so it does not need to be registered with the gatekeeper.
Figure 2-9 Networking in peer mode

N e tw
IP o rk
U s e rA

R o u te rA
GW

R o u te rB
GW

U se rB

G W s a re p e e rs

Registration mode
As shown in Figure 2-10, the gatekeeper is the carrier device and the gateway is the
enterprise device. The gateway can register with the gatekeeper to transmit voice services.
The gatekeeper needs to identify the registered gateway. After the gateway is registered on
the gatekeeper, the gatekeeper completes voice services initiated by the gateway. The
AR2200 does not function as the gateway, that is, the AR2200 does not send registration
packets.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-10 Networking in registration mode

IP o rk
N e tw
R o u te rB
GW

U se rA

G a te w a y re g iste rs w ith th e
g a te ke e p e r
GW

GK
R o u te rA
GK

Procedure
Step 1 Set H323 attributes.
l (Mandatory) Set H323 attribute.
Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Run:
h323-attribute

The H323 configuration view is displayed.


Run:
localip ip-address

The default local IP address is configured.


l (Optional) Set H323 attributes.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Action

Command

Remarks

Configure the
Q931
listening port.

q931-listenport q931listenport-value

By default, the Q931


listening port is 1720.

Configure the
AR2200
whether to
enable fast
start.

faststart-flag { enable| disable }

By default, fast start is


enabled.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

NOTE
After the fast start function is
enabled, sessions can be set up
quickly.

133

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Action

Command

Remarks

Configure the
AR2200
whether to
support the
H245 control
signaling
channel.

support-h245tul { enable | disable }

By default, the AR2200 does


not support the H245 control
signaling channel.

Set the
operation
mode for the
H323 stack.

workmode workmode-value

The values are as follows:


l international
l national
l VT
By default, the operation
mode is international.

Configure the
UDP port
number of
RAS signals.

rasport rasport-value

By default, the UDP port


number of RAS signals is
1719.

Configure the
H323 stack
system name.

h323-systemname h323systemnamevalue

Configure the
H323 stack
product name.

productname productname-value

Configure the
H323 stack
version.

h323version h323version-value

The values are as follows:


l V2
l V3
l V4
l V5
The default H323 stack
version is V4.

Configure the
H245 version.

h245version h245version-value

The values are as follows:


l V2
l V3
l V4
l V5
The default H245 version is
V4.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

2 PBX Configuration

Action

Command

Remarks

Configure the
display
header field in
Q931
messages.

displayname displayname-value

Set the value


of the TCP
keepalive
timer.

tcp-keepalive-timerlen tcp-keepalivetimerLen-value

By default, the value of the


TCP keepalive timer is 3600
ms.

Configure the
AR2200
whether to
support
automatic
setup of the
H245
channel.

auto-connect-controlchannel { enable | By default, H245 channels


cannot be set up
disable }
automatically.

Configure the
H323 stack
whether to
receive the
H245 address
in Setup
messages.

earlyh245 { enable | disable }

By default, a Setup message


does not contain the H245
address.

Set the
timeout
interval for
TCP
connections.

tcp-connection-timeout tcp-connectiontimeout-value

By default, the timeout


interval for TCP connections
is 15000 ms.

Set the
timeout
interval for
Setup
messages.

setup-wait-response-timeout setupwait-response-timeout-value

By default, the timeout


interval for Setup messages
is 500000 ms.

Set the
timeout
interval for
Alerting and
Connect
messages.

callproc-wait-response-timeout
callproc-wait-response-timeout-value

By default, the timeout


interval for Alerting and
Connect messages is 500000
ms.

Set the
timeout
interval for
Connect
messages.

recvalert-wait-response-timeout
recvalert-wait-response-timeout-value

By default, the timeout


interval for Connect
messages is 500000 ms.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Action

Command

Remarks

Set the
channel
establishment
timeout.

channels-timeout channels-timeoutvalue

By default, the channel


establishment timeout is
15000 ms.

Set the
timeout
interval of the
roundtrip
delay process.

roundtrip-delay-timeout roundtripdelay-timeout-value

By default, the timeout


interval is 15000 ms.

Set the
timeout
interval for
mode
switching.

requestmode-timeout requestmodetimeout-value

By default, the timeout


interval is 15000 ms.

Set the
timeout
interval of the
media loop
process.

medialoop-timeout medialoop-timeoutvalue

By default, the timeout


interval is 15000 ms.

Set the
timeout
interval for
the peer end to
send
EndSessionC
ommand
messages.

endsession-timeout endsession-timeoutvalue

By default, the timeout


interval is 15000 ms.

Set the value


for the H323
timer.

h323-app-timer timerindex timerlen

l Run:
reset

The H323 system is reset.


NOTE

After setting H323 system parameters, run the reset command to reset the H323 system to make the
parameters take effect.

l Run:
quit

Return to the voice view.


Step 2 Set parameters for an H323 trunk group.
l Run:
trunk-group name

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

A trunk group is created and the trunk group view is displayed.


l Run:
signalling-ip ip ip-address

The signaling IP address is configured for the H323 trunk group.


l Run:
media-ip { ip-address | addr-name addr-name-value }

The media IP address or dynamic media IP address name is configured for the H323 trunk
group.
l Run:
gwid gwid-value

The gateway ID of the peer device connected to the H323 trunk is configured.
NOTE

When the AR2200 functions as the gatekeeper, you must configure the gateway ID of the peer device.

l Run:
peer-address static primary-ip-value primary-port-value

The remote IP address and port number are configured for the remote H323 trunk of the H323
trunk group.
NOTE

When the AR2200 functions as the gateway, you must configure the remote IP address and port number.

l When there are trunk groups of various H323 types, perform the following operations.
Run:
techprefix techprefix-value

A technical prefix is configured.


Run:
send-techprefix h323-send-techprefix-value

The AR2200 is configured whether to send the technical prefix.


Run:
del-techprefix h323-send-techprefix-value

The AR2200 is configured whether to delete the technical prefix.


----End

Configuring E1R2 Trunk Group Parameters


Context
When the trunk group type is E1R2, perform the following operations:

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Configure R2 signaling parameters:
l Run:r2 signalling-type signalling-type-name A R2 signaling is created and the R2 signaling
view is displayed. Or a R2 signaling view that has been created is displayed.
l Run:line-signal-send line-logic-cmd line-logic-signal-type { Line-phy-cmd-para Line-callstate Line-phy-send-time | no-process } The sending parameters of R2 line signaling are
configured.
l Run:line-signal-receive Line-phy-signal-type Line-phy-cmd Line-phy-cmd-para Line-callstate{ Line-logic-cmd | no-process } The receiving parameter of R2 line signaling is
configured.
l Run:register-signal-receive Register-phy-cmd Register-call-state { Register-logic-cmd
Register-logic-cmd-para | no-process } The receiving parameter of R2 register signaling is
configured.
l Run: register-signal-send Register-logic-cmd Register-logic-cmd-para { register-phycmd | no-process } The sending parameter of R2 register signaling is configured.
l Run:quit The voice view is displayed.
Step 4 Configure R2 profile parameters:
l Run: r2 profile profile-name A R2 profile is created and the R2 profile view is displayed.
l Run: ling-signalling { line-signalling-type line-signalling-type-value | wait-answer-time
wait-answer-time-value | wait-clear-forward-time wait-clear-forward-time-value | waitprotect-time wait-protect-time-value | wait-seize-ack-time wait-seize-ack-time-value } The
line signaling of R2 profile is configured.
l Run: register-address-receive { country-code value | distinctive-indication value | echocancellation value | circuit-character value | calling-number value | calling-user-type
value | calling-user-priority value | called-number value | calling-number-location
calling-number-location-value | user-type-location user-type-location-value } The register
receiving address of R2 profile is configured.
l Run: register-address-send { country-code value | distinctive-indication value | echocancellation value | circuit-character value | calling-number value | calling-user-type
value | calling-user-priority value | called-number value } The register sending address of
R2 profile is configured.
l Run: register-signalling { back-pulse-time back-pulse-time-value | calling-number-maxlength calling-number-max-length-value | compelling-sequence-keepalive-time
compelling-sequence-keepalive-time-value | dtmf-send-interval dtmf-send-interval-time |
dtmf-send-time dtmf-send-time-value | incoming-type incoming-type-value | numbermax-interval number-max-interval-time | number-send-mode number-send-mode-value |
outgoing-type outgoing-type-value | receive-number-max-interval receive-number-maxinterval-time | send-pulse-signal signal-value | signal-send-voltage signal-send-voltagevalue | signal-stop-permit-time signal-stop-permit-time-value | wait-Bsignal-time waitBsignal-time-value | wait-caller-category-time wait-caller-category-time-value } The
register signaling of R2 profile is configured.
Step 5 Run:
signalling-type signalling-type-name

The multi-language adaptive signaling of R2 profile is configured.


Step 6 Run:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

quit

The voice view is displayed.


Step 7 Run:
trunk-group name

A trunk group is created and the trunk group view is displayed.


Step 8 Run:
r2-profile profile-name

The E1R2 signaling profile used by the E1R2 trunk group is configured.
Step 9 Run:
r2-receive-earlymedia r2-receive-earlymedia

Whether to enable the early media for E1R2 trunk group is configured.
Step 10 Run:
r2-play-ringback r2-play-ringback

Whether to enable the ringback tone (RBT) for E1R2 trunk group is configured.
----End

2.12.3 Binding Trunks in a Trunk Group


Binding Trunks to a SIP AT0 Trunk Group
Context
When the SIP trunk registration mode is trunk circuit registration, perform the following
operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
trunk-group name

The SIP AT0 trunk group view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
trunk-sipat0 name

The SIP AT0 trunk is added to a trunk group.


----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Binding Trunks to an AT0 Trunk Group


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
trunk-group name

The AT0 trunk group view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
trunk-at0 slotid/subcardid/portid [ config-status config-status-value | cid-transtype cid-trans-type-value | dial-delay dial-delay-value | dial-mode dial-modevalue | insert-prefix insert-prefix-value | insert-prefix-delay insert-prefixdelay-value | reversepole-detect reversepole-detect-value | default-called-telno
default-called-telno-value] *

Trunks are bound to an AT0 trunk group.


----End

Binding Trunks to a PRA Trunk Group


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
trunk-group name

The PRA trunk group view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
trunk-pra slotid/subcardid/portid

Trunks are bound to the PRA trunk group.


----End

Binding Trunks to an E1R2 Trunk Group


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
trunk-group name

The E1R2 trunk group view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
trunk-e1r2 slotid/subcardid/portid

Trunks are bound to the E1R2 trunk group.


NOTE

After the E1R2 trunk group is complete, to ensure that call services passing through the E1R2 trunk group
are transmitted correctly, local loopback cannot be configured on the VE1 interface. If local loopback has
been configured on the VE1 interface, cancel the local loopback configuration immediately. One minute
after the local loopback configuration is canceled, call services passing through the E1R2 trunk group are
restored.

----End

2.12.4 Resetting a SIP Trunk Group


To make SIP trunk group parameters take effect, reset the SIP trunk group.

Applicable Environment
To make modified SIP trunk group parameters take effect or restart a new SIP trunk group, reset
the SIP trunk group.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before resetting a SIP trunk group, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the SIP trunk group

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 3 Run:
trunk-group name

A trunk group is created and the trunk group view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
reset

The SIP trunk group is reset.

CAUTION
Exercise caution when you run this command because resetting a SIP trunk group affects running
services.
----End

2.12.5 Checking the Configuration


Prerequisites
All configurations of a trunk group are complete.

Procedure
l

Run the display voice trunk-group command to check the configuration of a trunk group.

----End

2.13 Configuring a Call Route


A call route is associated with a trunk group to enable users from different offices to call each
other.

Applicable Environment
As shown in Figure 2-11, the headquarters and branch of enterprise A are connected through a
SIP trunk. The headquarters is connected to PSTN networks of carrier A and carrier B. To reduce
call fees, configure call routes on the AR2200, which meet the following requirements:
l

Calls between users in the headquarters and branch are connected through the SIP trunk.

When users in the enterprise call external users, the calls are connected to the called users
through the network of carrier A or carrier B, depending on the charge rates used by the
carriers in different time ranges.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-11 Call route application

Branch

User B
PSTN
Carrier A

AR
Enterprise A
SIP

PSTN
Carrier B

IP
SIP

PRA

AT0

AR
Headquarters
PBX

Enterprise A

User A

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring a call route, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring a Call Prefix

Configuring a trunk group

Data Preparation
To configure a call route, you need the following data.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

No.

Data

Name of the call route

Enterprise, Centrex group, and DN set to which the calling number is bound, and
calling condition

Prefix of the called numbers to which the call route applies

Validity period of the call route

Trunk group associated with the call route


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

No.

Data

Trunk circuit selection mode

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
callprefix callprefix-name

A call prefix profile is created and its view is displayed.


By default, no call prefix profile is configured.
Step 4 Run:
callroute condition { caller-telno caller-telno-value | time-period { from fromdate [ from-time ] | to to-date [ to-time ] } * | time-repeat { { yearly |
monthly }begin-date [ begin-time ] [ end-date [ end-time ] ] | weekly beginweekday [ begin-time ] [ end-weekday [ end-time ] ] | daily begin-time [ endtime ] } }* trunkgroup1 trunkgroup1-name [ trunkgroup2 trunkgroup2-name |
trunkgroup3 trunkgroup3-name | trunkgroup4 trunkgroup4-name ]*

A call route is created.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice callroute command to check the configuration of a call route.

2.14 (Optional)Configuring Individualized PBX Services


The AR2200 supports multiple individualized PBX services.

2.14.1 Configuring the Abbreviated Dialing Service


The abbreviated dialing service allows a user to initiate a call by dialing the 2-digit abbreviated
code instead of the original called number.

Applicable Environment
After the abbreviated dialing service is configured on the AR2200, users can dial the 2-digit
abbreviated code instead of the original called number, which is convenient for users to operate
and manage the phone numbers.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the abbreviated dialing service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the abbreviated dialing service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Abbreviated code

PBX user name

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user identifier view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service-right abbdial enable

The abbreviated dialing service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service abbdial abb-telno called-telno

An abbreviated dialing service scheme is created.


By default, no abbreviated dialing service scheme is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service abbdial command to check the configuration
of the abbreviated dialing service.

2.14.2 Configuring the Call-out Restriction Service


You can restrict some outgoing calls of a phone, for example, toll calls.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Applicable Environment
To restrict outgoing calls such as international toll calls, configure the call-out restriction service.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the call-out restriction service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the call-out restriction service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

User name

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service-right cba enable

The outgoing call barring service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service cba { all | idd_cdd | idd }

A call-out restriction service scheme is created.


By default, no call-out restriction service scheme is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service cba command to check the configuration of
the call-out restriction service.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.14.3 Configuring the Call Forwarding Service


If the call forwarding service of a called party is activated and the call forwarding conditions
are met, calls are forwarded to a preset number.

Usage Scenario
To ensure that users can answer incoming calls, configure the following types of call forwarding
service:
l

Call Forwarding Busy (CFB): Incoming calls of a CFB user are forwarded to a preset
number when the user line is busy.

Call Forwarding No Reply (CFNR): Incoming calls of a CFNR user are forwarded to a
preset number when the user does not answer the call.

Call Forwarding Offline (CFO): Incoming calls of a CFO user are forwarded to a preset
number when the user is offline.

Call Forwarding Unconditional (CFU): All incoming calls of a CFU user are forwarded to
a preset number.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the call forwarding service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the call forwarding service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

PBX user name

Forwarded-to number

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user view is displayed.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

l To configure the CFB service, run:

service-right cfb enable

The CFB service is enabled.

service cfb fwd-telno

The CFB service is configured.


l To configure the CFNR service, run:

service-right cfnr enable

The CFNR service is enabled.

service cfnr { telno fwd-telno | time telno fwd-telno }

The CFNR service is configured.


l To configure the CFO service, run:

service-right cfo enable

The CFO service is enabled.

service cfo fwd-telno

The CFO service is configured.


l To configure the CFU service, run:

service-right cfu enable

The CFU service is enabled.

service cfu name

The CFU service is configured.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the following commands to check the call forwarding service:
l

Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service cfb command to check the CFB service.

Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service cfb command to check the CFNR service.

Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service cfo command to check the CFO service.

Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service cfu command to check the CFU service.

2.14.4 Configuring the Number Barring Service


Applicable Environment
To prevent a user from dialing a number, configure the number barring service.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the number barring service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Data Preparation
To configure the number barring service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

PBX user name

Restricted number

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service-right dlc enable

The number barring service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service dlc dlc-telno

The number to be rejected is configured.


By default, no number is rejected.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service dlc command to check the configuration of the
number barring service.

2.14.5 Configuring the DND Service


When a user calls a DND user, the user will hear the DND tone or busy tone.

Applicable Environment
The DND service allows a user to reject all incoming calls during a certain period.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the DND service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the DND function, you need the following data.
No.

Data

User identifier name

DND tone

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user identifier view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service-right dnd enable

The do-not-disturb service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service dnd [ tone-id tone-id ]

A DND service is created .


By default, no DND service scheme is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service dnd command to check the configuration of
the DND service.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.14.6 Configuring the RAC Service


The Reject Anonymous Call (RAC) service allows a user to reject an anonymous call (not
automatic number identification) and allows the system to play an announcement to the calling
number after call rejection.

Applicable Environment
To prevent anonymous calls, configure the RAC service.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the RAC service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the RAC service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

PBX user name

RAC tone

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service-right rac enable

The reject anonymous call service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service rac [ tone-id tone-id ]

An RAC service is configured.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

By default, no RAC service scheme is configured.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service rac command to check the configuration of the
RAC service.

2.14.7 Configuring the Remote Office Service


The remote office service allows a user to access from any terminal and share original services
such as short number dialing and call transfer.

Applicable Environment
The remote office service allows a user to access from any terminal and share original services
such as short number dialing and call transfer. Because the call initiator still dials the original
number in the remote office service, the user privacy is well protected.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the remote office service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the remote office service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

PBX user name

Destination number of the remote office service

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user view is displayed.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 4 Run:
service-right remote-office enable

The reject anonymous call service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service remote-office telno { centrex centrex-name short-num | [ country-code
countrycode ] [ area-code areacode ] telno }

The destination number of the remote office service is configured.


By default, the destination number of the remote office service is not configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service remote-office command to check the
configuration of the remote office service.

2.14.8 Configuring the Secretary Service


The secretary service allows a user to designate another phone number (for example, the
secretary's phone number) to process all incoming calls. That is, all incoming calls of the user
are transferred to the secretary's phone first, and only the secretary can call the user without
transferring.

Applicable Environment
You can configure the secretary service to filter incoming calls and prevent interruption.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the secretary service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the secretary service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

PBX User name

Secretary phone number

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user identifier view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service-right scr enable

The secretary service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service scr telno { centrex centrex-name short-num | countrycode areacode telno }

The destination number of the secretary is configured.


By default, the destination number of the secretary is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice service scr command to check the configuration of the secretary service.

2.14.9 Configuring the Wake-up Service


The wake-up service allows the system to send the wake-up tone to the user at the preset time.

Applicable Environment
When the wake-up time is due, the system sends the wake-up tone to the user.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the wake-up service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the wake-up service, you need the following data.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

No.

Data

User name

Wake-up time

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service-right wake-call enable

The wake-up service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service wake-call wake-time wake-time-value [ begin-date begin-date-value | wakedays wake-days-value | tone-id tone-id-value ] *

A wake-up service scheme is created.


By default, no wake-up service scheme is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice [ pbxuser user- name ] service wake-call command to check the
configuration of the wake-up service.

2.14.10 Configuring the RBT Service


The Ring Back Tone (RBT) service allows the calling party to hear the music or sound effect
customized by a called party but not the traditional beeper.

Usage Scenario
After a user registers the RBT service, the user can set different RBTs for a calling party or a
group of calling parties in different periods.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the RBT service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the RBT service, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

No.

Data

PBX user name

RBT file name

Number or trunk group that receives RBTs

Period in which an RBT is played

2 PBX Configuration

Context
If the RBT played for the caller through the FXO port is too loud, the FXO port may fail to detect
the busy tone from the caller; therefore, if the caller hangs up before the call is answered, the
called user still hears the ring tone for a period. To solve this problem, run the gain send send
command to adjust the send gain on an FXO interface.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service-right crbt enable

The RBT service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service crbt [ condition { caller-trunkgroup trunkgroup-name | caller-telno callertelno-value | time-period { from from-date [ from-time ] | to to-date [ to-time ] }
* | time-repeat { { yearly | monthly }begin-date [ begin-time ] [ end-date [ endtime ] ] | weekly begin-weekday [ begin-time ] [ end-weekday [ end-time ] ] |
daily begin-time [ end-time ] }* }*] crbt-file file-name-value

The RBT service is configured.


By default, no RBT service is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice service-crbt command to check the configuration of the RBT service.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.14.11 Configuring the SCR Service


The Selective Call Rejection (SCR) service filters every incoming call against a list of rejected
numbers created by a user and rejects those calls on the list.

Usage Scenario
If dialing some numbers is prevented, configure the SCR service.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the SCR service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the SCR service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

PBX User name

Rejected number

Period in which a call is rejected

Period in which a call is rejected repeatedly

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user identifier view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service-right rcs enable

The selective call rejection service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service rcs judgegrp judgegrp-value [ condition { caller-telno caller-telno-value
| time-period { from from-date [ from-time ] | to to-date [ to-time ] } * | time-

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

repeat { { yearly | monthly }begin-date [ begin-time ] [ end-date [ end-time ] ] |


weekly begin-weekday [ begin-time ] [ end-weekday [ end-time ] ] | daily begintime [ end-time ] }* }*] [ active active-value ]

The SCR service is configured.


By default, no SCR service is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ] service rcs command to check the configuration of the
SCR service scheme.

2.14.12 Configuring the SCA Service


The Selective Call Acceptance (SCA) service filters every incoming call against a list of numbers
specified by a user and accepts calls from only those numbers on the list.

Usage Scenario
To receive only some incoming calls, configure the SCA service.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the SCA service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring a PBX user

Data Preparation
To configure the SCA service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

PBX user name

Accepted phone number

Period in which a call is accepted

Period in which a call is accepted repeatedly

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 3 Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service-right sca enable

The selective call acceptance service is enabled.


Step 5 Run:
service sca judgegrp judgegrp-value [ condition { caller-telno caller-telno-value
| time-period { from from-date [ from-time ] | to to-date [ to-time ] } * | timerepeat { { yearly | monthly }begin-date [ begin-time ] [ end-date [ end-time ] ] |
weekly begin-weekday [ begin-time ] [ end-weekday [ end-time ] ] | daily begintime [ end-time ] }* }*] [ active active-value ]

The SCA service is configured.


By default, no SCA service is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice [ pbxuser name ]service sca command to check the configuration of the
SCA service.

2.15 (Optional) Configuring Group Services on the PBX


When functioning as a PBX, the AR2200 supports various individual services. You can
configure services for individual users as required.

2.15.1 Configuring the Call Interception Service


The call interception service provides a voice prompt when a call fails to be connected. The user
can learn about the failure cause and determine whether to redial the called number according
to the voice prompt.

Usage Scenario
A call may fail to be connected for some reasons, for example, the called user is busy, the called
user does not answer the call, the called user is offline, the called number does not exist, the
calling user does not have right to make this call, or the called user is unreachable. If the call
interception service is not configured, the calling user only hears the busy tone but does not
know the reason. If the user redials the called number multiple times but the call still fails to be
connected, the user experience is degraded and network resources are wasted. The call
interception service allows the system to play a user-friendly voice prompt when a call failed to
be connected. The called user knows the cause of the call failure and determines whether to
redial the called number according to the voice prompt. This improves the user experience,
reduces invalid dial attempts, and saves resources on the AR2200.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the call interception service, complete the following tasks:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Data Preparation
To configure the call interception service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Call interception plan name, enterprise, DN set, and call prefix to be bound to the
call interception plan, and call status.

(Optional) ID of the prompt tone used for call interception

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
service call-intercept call-intercept-name

A call interception service plan is created and the call interception service view displayed.
By default, no call interception service plan is configured.
NOTE

Before creating a call interception plan, run the service-right call-intercept enable command in the PBX
user view to enable the call interception service right.

Step 4 Set mandatory parameters for the call interception service plan.
l Run:
enterprise enterprise-name [ dn-set dn-set-name | centrex centrex-name ]

An enterprise, a DN set, and a Centrex group are bound to the call interception service plan.
l Run:
callprefix callprefix-name

A call prefix is bound to the call interception service plan.


l Run:
call-status { busy | no_answer | offline | dnerror | no_right | unreachable }

The call status is configured.


Step 5 (Optional) Run:
tone-id tone-id-value

A prompt tone is specified for call interception.


----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice service call-intercept [ call-intercept-name ] command to check the call
interception service configuration.

2.15.2 Configuring the Distinctive Ringing Service


The distinctive ringing service plays different ring tones to users based on call prefixes (local
calls, national toll calls, international toll calls, and intra-group calls).

Applicable Environment
User A and user B belong to the same Centrex group, and user C is out of the Centrex group. If
the distinctive ringing service is not configured, the same ring tone is played to user B no matter
whether user A or user C calls user B. User B cannot know whether the call is from a Centrex
user or an external user according to the ring tone. After the distinctive ringing service is
configured, users in the Centrex group can identify calls from users in the same Centrex group
and outside the Centrex group.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the distinctive ringing service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Creating an enterprise

Creating a Centrex group

Data Preparation
To the distinctive ringing service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Distinctive ringing service plan name, and enterprise and Centrex group bound to the
plan

(Optional) Ring IDs for intra-group calls, local calls, national toll calls, and
international toll calls

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
service alert-ring alert-ring-name

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

A distinctive ringing service plan is created and the distinctive ringing service view is displayed.
By default, no distinctive ringing service plan is configured.
Step 4 Set mandatory parameters for the distinctive ringing service plan.
l Run:
enterprise enterprise-name [ centrex centrex-name ]

An enterprise is bound to the distinctive ringing service plan.


Step 5 Set optional parameters for the distinctive ringing service plan.
l Run:
centrex-ring-id centrex-ring-id-value

The ring ID for intra-group calls is specified.


l Run:
out-local-ring-id out-local-ring-id-value

The ring ID for local calls is specified.


l Run:
out-ddd-ring-id out-ddd-ring-id-value

The ring ID for national toll calls is specified.


l Run:
out-idd-ring-id out-idd-ring-id-value

The ring ID for international toll calls is specified.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice service alert-ring [ alert-ring-name ] command to check the
configuration of the distinctive ringing service plan.

2.15.3 Configuring the Enterprise RBT Service


The enterprise RBT service allows an enterprise to play a customized audio file to calling users.

Usage Scenario
If the RBT service is not configured for an enterprise, a user only hears the common ring back
tone when calling a user in the enterprise. With the enterprise RBT service, the enterprise can
play an advertisement or enterprise information to calling users. The enterprise can also
configure different RBTs for customers. The enterprise RBT service improves user experience
and helps the enterprise raise brand image.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the enterprise RBT service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Creating an enterprise

Creating a trunk group

Data Preparation
To configure the enterprise RBT service, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

No.

Data

Name of the RBT service plan and enterprise bound to the plan

(Optional) Trunk group that can receive the enterprise RBT

(Optional) Calling numbers that can receive the enterprise RBT

(Optional) Duration in which the enterprise RBT can be played

2 PBX Configuration

Context
If the RBT played for the caller through the FXO port is too loud, the FXO port may fail to detect
the busy tone from the caller; therefore, if the caller hangs up before the call is answered, the
called user still hears the ring tone for a period. This problem can be solved by adjusting the
send gain on the FXO interface.

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
enterprise enterprise-name

The enterprise view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
service crbt [ condition { caller-telno caller-telno-value | caller-trunkgroup
trunkgroup-name | time-period { from from-date [ from-time ] | to to-date [ totime ] } * | time-repeat { yearly begin-date [ begin-time ] [ end-date [ endtime] ] | monthly begin-date [ begin-time ] [ end-date [ end-time] ] | weekly beginweekday [ begin-time ] [ end-weekday [ end-time ] ] | daily begin-time [ endtime] } } ] file-name file-name-value

The enterprise RBT service is configured.


By default, no enterprise RBT service is configured.
NOTE

Before configuring the enterprise RBT service, run the service-right crbt enable command in the PBX user
view to enable the enterprise RBT service.

----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice service crbt [ name ] command to check the configuration of the RBT
service.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

2.15.4 Configure the IVR Service


The Interactive Voice Response (IVR) service allows enterprises to customize their IVR menu
and prompt tone, improving user experiences.

Establishing the Configuration Task


Before configuring an IVR service, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.

Applicable Environment
The interactive voice response (IVR) service provides the automated attendant function and
allows enterprises to make their own IVR menus and voice prompts.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring an IVR service, complete the following task:
NOTE

If the codec mode is set to G.723, access terminals cannot use the IVR service.

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Data Preparation
To configure the IVR service, you need the following data.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

No.

Data

Name, enterprise, description, and status of the IVR file

IVR menu name, type, enterprise, prompt tone, and optional parameters, including
the menu tone, prompt tone played when there is no input on the IVR menu within
the specified period, prompt tone played when the input information does not match
the preconfigured information of the IVR menu, prompt tone played when the number
of incorrect inputs on the IVR menu reaches the maximum value, tone interruption
flag, whether to replay the prompt tone when there is no input on the IVR menu within
the specified period, whether to replay the prompt tone when the input information
does not match the preconfigured information of the IVR menu, wait duration, and
maximum number of times the input information does not match the preconfigured
information of the IVR menu

IVR action menu name, current action status of the menu, operation code, IVR action
code, and optional parameters, including the prompt tone, sub-menu, forward-to
number, DN set of the forward-to number, Centrex group, and enterprise of the
forward-to number

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

No.

Data

Enterprise, DN set, access number, validity period, validity cycle mode, calling
number, switchboard number, and optional parameters, including the prompt tone,
destination enterprise name used when the IVR group connects a call to an extension
phone number, maximum queue duration and maximum number of calls in a queue,
(optional) ringing duration and ringing mode, flag indicating whether the IVR group
can directly connect to the switchboard, and menu name of the IVR group

Enterprise, DN set, and optional parameters, including the maximum queue duration
and maximum number of calls in a queue and ringing duration and ringing mode of
the NAVI group

Configuring an IVR File


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
ivr-file file-name-value

The IVR file name is configured.


Step 4 Run:
enterprise enterprise-name

An enterprise is bound to the IVR file.


Step 5 Set optional parameters for the IVR file.
l Run:
description desc-value

The IVR file description is configured.


l Run:
status status-value

The IVR file status is specified.


----End

Configuring an IVR Menu

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
ivr-menu ivr-menu-name [ root-menu | sub-menu ]

An IVR menu is created and the IVR menu view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
enterprise enterprise-name

An enterprise is bound to the IVR menu.


Step 5 Run:
prompt-tone { toneid

| ivr-file name }

The prompt tone is configured for the IVR menu.


Step 6 Run:
father-menu father-menu-name

The parent menu of the IVR is configured.


NOTE

When the IVR menu is a root menu, this step can be skipped.

Step 7 Set optional parameters for the IVR menu.


l Run:
menu-tone { toneid | ivr-file name }

The IVR menu tone is configured.


l Run:
no-input-tone { toneid | ivr-file name }

The prompt tone played when there is no input on the IVR menu within the specified period
is configured.
l Run:
no-match-tone { toneid | ivr-file name }

The prompt tone played when the input information does not match the preconfigured
information of the IVR menu.
l Run:
max-error-tone { toneid | ivr-file name }

The prompt tone played when the number of incorrect inputs on the IVR menu reaches the
maximum value is configured.
l Run:
menu-bargein menubargein-value

The tone interruption flag is configured.


l Run:
no-input-reprompt { enable | disable }

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The device determines whether to replay the prompt tone when there is no input on the IVR
menu within the specified period.
l Run:
no-match-reprompt { enable | disable }

The device determines whether to replay the prompt tone when the input information does
not match the preconfigured information of the IVR menu.
l Run:
menu-wait-timer value

The wait duration is set for the IVR menu.


l Run:
max-error-num value

The maximum number of times the input information does not match the preconfigured
information of the IVR menu is set.
----End

Configuring an IVR Action


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
ivr-action name

An IVR action is created.


Step 4 Run:
ivr-menu name

The menu name of the IVR action is configured.


Step 5 Run:
current-state current-menu-state-value

The current action status of the menu is configured.


Step 6 Run:
menu-actcode { call-navi-group | call-transfer transfer-telephone-number | go-submenu sub-menu-name | play-prompt-tone { tone-id | ivr-file file-name } | releasecall | replay-menu-tone | return-father-menu | return-root-menu }

An action code is set.


Step 7 Run:
operation-code menu-opercode-value

An IVR operation code is set.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 8 Set optional parameters for the IVR action.


l Run:
next-state out-menu-state-value

The IVR menu status displayed after the IVR action is taken is configured.
l Run:
destination enterprise destination-enterprise-name [ dn-set dn-set-name |
centrex centrex-name ]*

The destination enterprise name, destination DN set, and destination Centrex group are
configured for the forward-to number of the IVR action.
----End

Configuring an IVR Group


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxusergroup user-group-name ivr [ enterprise enterprise-name ]

An IVR group is created and the IVR group view is displayed.


Step 4 Run:
dn-set dn-set-value

A DN set is bound to the IVR group.


Step 5 Run:
access-telno { centrex centrex-name centrex-telno-value | [ country-code countrycode-value ] [ area-code area-code-value ] telno-value }

An access number is set for the IVR group.


Step 6 Run:
condition { caller-telno caller-telno-value | time-period { from from-date [ fromtime ] | to to-date [ to-time ] } * | time-repeat { { yearly | monthly }begin-date
[ begin-time ] [ end-date [ end-time ] ] | weekly begin-weekday [ begin-time ]
[ end-weekday [ end-time ] ] | daily begin-time [ end-time ] }* }*

The calling party, validity period, and time repeat mode are configured for the IVR group.
Step 7 Run:
console-telno value

A switchboard number is set for the IVR group.


Step 8 Set optional parameters for the IVR group.
l Run:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

tone-id { tone-id-value | file name }

A tone is configured for the IVR group.


l Run:
destination { dn-set dn-set-name | centrex centrex-name | enterprise enterprisename}*

The destination enterprise name used when the IVR group connects a call to an extension
phone number is configured.
l Run:
queue enable [ maximum-queue
value ]

maximum-queue-value | queue-time queue-time-

The maximum queue duration and maximum number of calls in a queue are set.
l Run:
ring { mode ring-mode-value | time ring-time-value | select select-mode-value }

The ringing duration and ringing mode are set.


l Run:
direct-trans-console { disable

| enable }

The flag indicating whether the IVR group can connect to the switchboard is set.
l Run:
navigate-menu menu-name

A menu name is configured for the IVR group.


----End

Configuring an IVR Navigation Group


Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxusergroup user-group-name navi [ enterprise enterprise-name ]

The navigation group is configured.


Step 4 Run:
dn-set dn-set-value

A DN set is bound to the IVR navigation group.


Step 5 Run:
menu menu-name

A menu name is configured for the IVR navigation group.


Step 6 Run:
menu-opercode value

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

An operation code input when the IVR navigation group takes the menu action is configured.
Step 7 Set optional parameters for the IVR navigation group.
l Run:
queue enable [ maximum-queue
value ]

maximum-queue-value | queue-time queue-time-

The maximum queue duration and maximum number of calls in a queue are set.
l Run:
ring { mode ring-mode-value | time ring-time-value
value }

| select

select-mode-

The ringing duration and ringing mode are set.


----End

Checking the Configuration


After the configurations of IVR navigation service are complete, you can verify the
configurations.

Procedure
l

Run the display voice ivr-action [ ivr-action-name ] command to view information about
one IVR action or all IVR actions.

Run the display voice ivr-file [ ivr-file-name ] command to view information about one
IVR file or all IVR files.

Run the display voice ivr-menu [ ivr-menu-name ] command to view information about
one IVR menu or all IVR menus.

Run the display voice pbxusergroup [ pbxusergroup-name ] command to check the


configuration of the PBX user group.

----End

2.15.5 Configuring the Number Change Service


You can configure rules to change calling numbers or DN sets.

Usage Scenario
To hide calling numbers or display the same calling number for all outgoing calls, configure the
number change service.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the number change service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring PBX users

Data Preparation
To configure the number change service, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

No.

Data

Name of the number change plan

Enterprise and DN set bound to the number change plan, calling number that needs
to be changed, and number change rule

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
caller-change [ dn-set dn-set-name ] [ enterprise enterprise-name ] caller
[ centrex centrex-name centrex-telno-value ] [ country-code country-code-value ]
[ area-code area-code-value ] telno-value operation-type { new-enterprise newenterprise-name | new-dn-set new-dn-set-name | new-centrex new-centrex-name | [ newcountry-code new-country-code-value ] [ new-area-code new-area-code-value ] } *

A number change service plan is configured.


By default, no number change service plan is configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice caller-change [ caller [ centrex centrex-name centrex-telno-value ]
[ country-code country-code-value] [ area-code area-code-value ] telno-value ] command to
check the configuration of the number change service.

2.15.6 Configuring the Pre-routing Number Change Service


You can configure rules to change calling numbers or DN sets.

Usage Scenario
You can configure pre-routing number change plans to define various dialing modes and change
the calling number displayed on the called party's phone. For example, a POTS user (using the
number 28761000) connected to an IP PBX makes a local call by dialing 0755 28961000. The
configured call route connects local outgoing calls with call prefix 2896 through an AT0 trunk.
Therefore, a pre-routing number change plan needs to be configured to remove 0755 from the
called number.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the pre-routing number change service, complete the following tasks:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring PBX users

2 PBX Configuration

Data Preparation
To configure the pre-routing number change service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Name of the pre-routing number change plan

Enterprise, DN set, Centrex group, and call prefix bound to the pre-routing number
change plan

Calling numbers that need to be changed before routing, calling number change rule,
and called number change rule

(Optional) New enterprise name and Centrex group name used after number change

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
beforeroute-change name

A pre-routing number change plan is created and its view is displayed.


By default, no pre-routing number change service plan is configured.
Step 4 Run:
callprefix callprefix-name

A call prefix is bound to the pre-routing number change plan.


Step 5 Run:
condition caller-telno { [ country-code country-code-value ] [ area-code area-codevalue ] telno-value | centrex centrex-telno-value }

A calling number that needs to be changed before routing is specified.


Step 6 Configure a pre-routing number change rule.
NOTE

A calling number change rule and a called number change rule must be configured simultaneously. If the
calling number or called number keeps unchanged, set the number rule mode to no-change.

l Run:
caller { del-then-insert del-offset del-len insert-telnum | del del-offsetval
del-lenval | insert insert-offset insert-telnum-val | no-change }

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

A calling number change rule is configured.


l Run:
called { del-then-insert del-offset del-len insert-telnum | del del-offsetval
del-lenval | insert insert-offset insert-telnum-val | no-change }

A called number change rule is configured.


Step 7 (Optional) Perform the following steps as required.
l Run:
call new-attribute { enterprise enterprise-name | dn-set dn-set-name | centrex
centrex name } *

The pre-routing number change service is configured.


l Run:
call re-analyse reanalyze-value

The AR2200 is configured to or not to reanalyze the changed numbers.


l Run:
call dual-dial-tone-flag dual-dial-tone-flag-value

The AR2200 is configured to or not to play second dial tone.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice beforeroute-change [ name ] command to check the configuration of the
pre-routing number change service.

2.15.7 Configuring the Post-routing Number Change Service


You can configure rules to change calling numbers or DN sets.

Usage Scenario
You can configure post-routing number change plans to define various dialing modes and change
the calling number displayed on the called party's phone. A post-routing number change plan
changes a called number to a long number. A post-routing number change plan can change a
called number to a long number ensure that it complies with the required number format. For
example, a POTS user (using the number 2876100) connected to an IP PBX makes a national
toll call by dialing 075528560982. A post-routing number change plan adds 12523 to the called
number 07552856098. 12523 is the call prefix defined by the carrier for the enterprise. When
the carrier's device detects the call prefix 12523, it connects the outgoing call through the
matching trunk. This reduces the call fees of the enterprise.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the post-routing number change service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Configuring PBX users

Data Preparation
To configure the post-routing number change service, you need the following data.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

No.

Data

Name of the post-routing number change plan

Enterprise and DN set bound to the post-routing number change plan

Calling numbers that need to be changed after routing

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
afterroute-change name

A post-routing number change plan is created and its view is displayed.


By default, no post-routing number change service plan is configured.
Step 4 Run:
callprefix callprefix-name

A call prefix is bound to the post-routing number change plan.


Step 5 Run:
condition caller-telno { [ country-code country-code-value ] [ area-code area-codevalue ] telno-value | centrex centrex-telno-value }

A calling number that needs to be changed after routing is specified.


Step 6 Run:
trunk-group trunk-group-name

A trunk group is bound to the post-routing number change plan.


Step 7 Configure a post-routing number change rule.
NOTE

A calling number change rule and a called number change rule must be configured simultaneously. If the
calling number or called number keeps unchanged, set the number rule mode to no-change.

l Run:
caller { del-then-insert del-offset del-len insert-telnum | del del-offsetval
del-lenval | insert insert-offset insert-telnum-val | no-change }

A calling number change rule is configured.


l Run:
called { del-then-insert del-offset del-len insert-telnum | del del-offsetval
del-lenval | insert insert-offset insert-telnum-val | no-change }

A called number change rule is configured.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 8 (Optional) Run:


call new-attribute { enterprise enterprise-name | centrex centrex-name }

The pre-routing number change service is configured.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice afterroute-change [ name ] command to check the configuration of the
post-routing number change service.

2.15.8 Configuring the PBX Line Selection Service


After the PBX line selection service is configured on the AR2200, a calling party can dial the
access number of a PBX group, and the AR2200 uses the configured line selection mode to
connect the call to a user in the group.

Usage Scenario
To configure the PBX line selection service, create a PBX group and allocate an access number
to all users in the PBX group. When a user on the public network dials the access number, the
call processing program selects an idle line to connect the call by using the configured line
selection mode.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the PBX line selection service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Creating an enterprise

Creating a trunk group

Data Preparation
To configure the PBX line selection service, you need to the following data.
No.

Data

Name of a PBX group

Enterprise bound to the PBX group

access number of the PBX group

DN set bound to the PBX group

(Optional) Ringing duration, ringing mode, and line selection mode

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxusergroup user-group-name hunt [ enterprise enterprise-name ]

The PBX line selection service is configured.


By default, no PBX line selection service is configured.
Step 4 Run:
dn-set dn-set-value

A DN set is bound to the PBX group.


Step 5 Run:
access-telno { centrex centrex-name centrex-telno-value | [ country-code countrycode-value ] [ area-code area-code-value ] telno-value }

The access number of the PBX group is configured.


NOTE

The access number must be a local user number.

Step 6 (Optional) Run:


ring { mode ring-mode-value | time ring-time-value | select select-mode-value }

The ringing duration, ringing mode, and line selection mode are configured.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice pbxusergroup [ pbxusergroup-name ] command to check the
configuration of the PBX user group.

2.15.9 Configuring the Co-Group Pickup Service


The co-group pickup service allows users in the same group to answer calls for each other on
their own phones. For example, when the phone of user A rings, user B in the same group can
dial the service access code plus user A's phone number to answer the call.

Usage Scenario
Before the co-group pickup service is configured, some calls will be missing if the called parties
do not answer the calls in a timely manner. After the co-group pickup service is configured,
users in the same group can answer calls for each other on their own phones. For example, if
user A does not answer a call, user B in the same group can dial the service access code plus
user A's phone number to answer the call. This service reduces missing calls.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the co-group pickup service, complete the following tasks:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Creating an enterprise

2 PBX Configuration

Data Preparation
To configure the co-group pickup service, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Name of the pickup group

Enterprise bound to the pickup group

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxusergroup user-group-name pickup [ enterprise enterprise-name ]

The pickup service is configured.


By default, no pickup service is configured.
NOTE

Before configuring the pickup service, run the service-right pickup-in-group enable command in the PBX
user view to enable the pickup service.

----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice pbxusergroup [ pbxusergroup-name ] command to check the
configuration of the PBX user group.

2.15.10 Configuring Simultaneous Ringing


When a calling party dials the access number of a simultaneous ringing group, all member phones
in the group ring simultaneously, and the called party can answer the call using any ringing
phone.

Usage Scenario
Before simultaneous ringing is configured, some calls will be missing if the called parties do
not answer the calls in a timely manner. After simultaneous ringing is configured, when user B
calls user A using the access number of a simultaneous ringing group, all the idle member phones
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

in the group ring simultaneously, and user A can answer the call using any ringing phone.
Simultaneous ringing reduces missing calls and improves the call connection ratio without
requiring additional devices.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring simultaneous ringing, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Creating an enterprise

Data Preparation
To configure simultaneous ringing, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Simultaneous ringing group name

Enterprise and DN set bound to the simultaneous ringing group

Access number of the simultaneous ringing group

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxusergroup user-group-name ring-parallel [ enterprise enterprise-name ]

The simultaneous ringing group is configured.


By default, no simultaneous ringing group is configured.
Step 4 Run:
dn-set dn-set-value

A DN set is bound to the simultaneous ringing group.


Step 5 Run:
access-telno { centrex centrex-name centrex-telno-value | [ country-code countrycode-value ] [ area-code area-code-value ] telno-value }

An access number is set for the simultaneous ringing group.


----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice pbxusergroup [ pbxusergroup-name ] command to check the
configuration of the PBX user group.

2.15.11 Configuring Sequential Ringing


When a calling party dials the access number of a sequential ringing group, member phones in
the group ring in the configured sequence.

Usage Scenario
Before sequential ringing is configured, some calls will be missing if the called parties do not
answer the calls in a timely manner. After sequential ringing is configured, when user B calls
user A using the access number of a sequential ringing group, member phones in the group ring
in the configured sequence. Sequential ringing reduces missing calls and improves the call
connection ratio without requiring additional devices.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring sequential ringing, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Creating an enterprise

Data Preparation
To configure sequential ringing, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Sequential ringing group name

Enterprise and DN set bound to the sequential ringing group

Access number of the sequential ringing group

(Optional) Ringing duration and line selection mode of the sequential ringing group

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxusergroup user-group-name hunt [ enterprise enterprise-name ]

The sequential ringing group is configured.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

By default, no sequential ringing group is configured.


Step 4 Run:
dn-set dn-set-value

A DN set is bound to the sequential ringing group.


Step 5 Run:
access-telno { centrex centrex-name centrex-telno-value | [ country-code countrycode-value ] [ area-code area-code-value ] telno-value }

An access number is set for the sequential ringing group.


Step 6 (Optional) Run:
ring { time ring-time-value | select select-mode-value }

The ringing duration and line selection mode are set for the sequential ringing group.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice pbxusergroup [ pbxusergroup-name ] command to check the
configuration of the PBX user group.

2.15.12 Configuring the One Number Link You Service


When the calling party calls the one number link you (ONLY) number of the called party,
multiple terminals of the called party ring according to the configured rules, and the called party
can select one terminal to answer the incoming call.

Usage Scenario
Before the ONLY service is configured, some calls will be missing if the called parties do not
answer the calls in a timely manner. After the ONLY service is configured, a user is bound to
multiple terminals. When user B calls user A using the access number of the ONLY service,
multiple terminals of user A ring according to the configured rules, and user A can select one
terminal to answer the call. Therefore, the ONLY service reduces missing calls and improves
the call connection ratio.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the ONLY service, complete the following tasks:
l

Configuring the AR2200 to work in PBX mode

Creating an enterprise

Data Preparation
To configure the ONLY service, you need the following data.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

No.

Data

ONLY service name


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

No.

Data

Enterprise and DN set bound to the ONLY service and access number of the ONLY
service

(Optional) Ringing duration, ringing mode, and line selection mode of the ONLY
service

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
pbxusergroup user-group-name unicall [ enterprise enterprise-name ]

The ONLY service is configured.


By default, no ONLY service is configured.
Step 4 Run:
dn-set dn-set-value

A DN set is bound to the ONLY service.


Step 5 Run:
access-telno { centrex centrex-name centrex-telno-value | [ country-code countrycode-value ] [ area-code area-code-value ] telno-value }

An access number is set for the ONLY service.


Step 6 (Optional) Run:
ring { mode ring-mode-value | time ring-time-value | select select-mode-value }

The ringing duration, ringing mode, and line selection mode are set for the ONLY service.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice pbxusergroup [ pbxusergroup-name ] command to check the
configuration of the PBX user group.

2.15.13 Configuring the Blacklist or Whitelist Function


You can implement the blacklist or whitelist function by configuring a rule set blacklist or
whitelist for a trunk group to control call rights of users.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Applicable Environment
After a trunk group is configured, all calls meeting the call conditions configured in the trunk
group are allowed. To restrict call rights of users, you can configure a rule set for the trunk group
to allow or reject calls of specified users.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the blacklist or whitelist function, complete the following task:
l

Configuring the trunk group

Data Preparation
To configure the blacklist or whitelist function, you need the following data.
No.

Data

Name of the rule set

Enterprise to which the rule set is applied

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


Step 2 Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


Step 3 Run:
rule-set rule-set-name

A rule set is configured to implement the blacklist or whitelist function.


Step 4 Run:
rule { deny | permit } { incoming | outgoing } caller-telno caller-telno-value

The rule set type (blacklist or whitelist) and restricted call type are specified.
Step 5 Run:
enterprise enterprise-name

An enterprise is bound to the rule set.


Step 6 Run:
quit

Return to the voice view.


Step 7 Run:
trunk-group name

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

The trunk group view is displayed.


Step 8 Run:
use-rule-set rule-set-name

The rule set is applied to the trunk group.


----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the display voice rule-set [ rule-set-name ] command to check the blacklist/whitelist
configuration.

2.15.14 Configuring the DISA Service


The direct inward system access (DISA) service controls the incoming calls and outgoing calls
on a PBX. Only authenticated users can use voice services on the PBX.

Applicable Environment
The DISA service can be used in the following scenarios:
l

Controlling incoming calls made by external users


To prevent unauthorized users to connect to an enterprise's PBX, the DISA service can be
configured on the PBX to enable the PBX to authenticate PBX users. To use the voice
service provided by the PBX, an external user needs to dial a specified phone number of
the enterprise and then enter authentication information as prompted. The user can use
voice services provided by the PBX only after being authenticated by the PBX. As shown
in Figure 2-12, the PBX has the DISA service configured, with the access number 800.
When user A dials 25600000, a voice message is played, prompting user A to enter
authentication information. After user A is authenticated, the PBX provides voice services
to user A.
NOTE

The DISA service access number is an internal number of the enterprise.

Figure 2-12 Controlling incoming calls from external users

PSTN
User A

Port 1/0/4

AT0 trunk
External number:
25600000
Internal number: 800

PBX

User B
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

User C

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Controlling outgoing calls made by internal users


When an enterprise wants to provide differentiated voice services to internal users, the
DISA service can be configured on the enterprise's PBX. After internal users are
authenticated, they can obtain voice services in addition to the basic voice service. As shown
in Figure 2-13, the DISA service is configured on the PBX to control the call-out right of
internal users. User B and user C are internal users, and user A is an external user. When
user B and user C need to call user A, they dial the DISA service access number and enter
authentication information as prompted. They can call user A only after being
authenticated.
Figure 2-13 Controlling outgoing calls from internal users

PSTN
User A

Port 1/0/4

AT0 trunk

PBX

User B

User C

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the DISA service, complete the following task:
l

Configuring PBX users

Data Preparation
To configure the DISA service, you need the following data.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

No.

Data

Name of the DISA service account set

Enterprise name

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Procedure
Step 1 Create an account set and configure the authentication mode for the account set.
1.

Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


2.

Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


3.

Run:
account-set account-set-name [account | password ]

An account set is created and the authentication mode is configured.


4.

Run:
enterprise enterprise-name

An enterprise is bound to the account set.


Step 2 Configure an account and password for the account set.
l

When the account set uses account authentication, run the account account-value
password { simple | cipher } password-value command to configure an account and
password for the account set.

When the account set uses password authentication, run the password { simple | cipher}
password-value command to configure a password for the account set.

Step 3 Run:
quit

Return to the voice view.


Step 4 Configure the DISA service.
1.

Run:
disa disa-name [ enterprise enterprise-name ]

A DISA service profile is created and the DISA service view is displayed.
2.

Run:
dn-set dn-set-name

A DN set is bound to the DISA service.


3.

Use either of the following methods to configure the DISA service access number. (Use
the first method when the PBX needs to control outgoing calls from external users.)
l Run the access-telno [ country-code country-code-value ] [ area-code area-codevalue ] telno-value command to set to the DISA service access number to a user phone
number.
l Run the access-telno centrex centrex-name centrex-number command to set the DISA
service access number to a Centrex group number.

4.

Run:
use-account-set account-set-name

The account set is bound to the DISA service.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

5.

2 PBX Configuration

(Optional) Run:
dst-enterprise dst-enterprise-name [ dst-dnset dst-dnset-name ] [ dst-centrex
dst-centrex-name ]

The destination enterprise, destination DN set, and destination Centrex are specified for
the DISA service.
----End

Checking the Configuration


Run the following commands to verify the configuration:
l

Run the display voice account-set [ account-value ] command to check the configuration
of the account set.

Run the display voice disa [ disa-name ] command to check the DISA service
configuration.

2.15.15 Configuring the Immediate Conference Service


The intermediate conference service allows more than three users to join a voice conversation.

Applicable Environment
During a conversation between user A and user B, user A or user B can press the hookflash and
then dial 3 and user C's phone number to invite user C to the conversation. If they want to invite
other users to the conversation, the intermediate service is required. If user A has the intermediate
conference right, user A can press hookflash and dial 6 and user D's phone number to invite user
D to the conference.
Figure 2-14 shows the intermediate conference usage scenario.
Figure 2-14 Networking of the intermediate conference service

IMS/IP
network

PBX

User A
(POTS)

User C
(POTS)
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

SIPAG

User D
(POTS)

User B
(SIPUE)

User E
(SIPUE)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

NOTE

To use the intermediate conference service, the user that initiates an intermediate conference must be in a
three-party conversation.

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the intermediate conference service, complete the following task:
l

Configuring PBX users

Perform the following steps to configure the intermediate conference service for the POTS
and SIPUE users connected to the PBX:

Procedure

1.

Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


2.

Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


3.

Run:
pbxuser name

The PBX user view is displayed.


4.

Run:
service-right instant-conference enable

The intermediate conference service right is granted to the PBX user.


5.

Run:
quit

The voice view is displayed.


6.

Run:
callprefix callprefix-name

The call prefix profile view is displayed.


7.

Run:
call-type category supplementary-service attribute 191

The call type and call attribute are configured for the intermediate conference service.
8.

Run:
quit

Return to the PBX view.


9.

(Optional) Run:
pbx service-priority

The priority of the intermediate conference service is configured.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

NOTE

l By default, the three-party service has a higher priority than the intermediate conference
service. The three-party and intermediate conference services have the same service process
when there are three parties in a conversation. When a user has the rights of both the threeparty service and intermediate conference service, the PBX determines whether to start the
three-party service or intermediate conference service based on priorities of the two
services.
l To configure the PBX to start the intermediate conference service, you can also run the
service-right three-party disable command to disable the three-party service. In this case,
you do not need to perform step 9.

Perform the following steps to enable the POTS and SIPUE users connected to the SIP AG
to use the intermediate conference service:
1.

Run:
system-view

The system view is displayed.


2.

Run:
voice

The voice view is displayed.


3.

Run:
sipag

The SIP AG view is displayed.


4.

Run:
conference-factory-uri

The conference factory URI is specified for the SIP AG.

2.16 Configuration Examples


This section provides a PBX configuration example.

2.16.1 Example for Configuring Voice Services for a Small- or


Medium-sized Enterprise
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-15, an enterprise has POTS users: User A, User B, and User C. The
requirements are as follows:
l

Internal calls of the enterprises are connected through the PBX, and outgoing calls from
the enterprises are connected to external users through the AT0 trunk.

The carrier allocates the number 56623000 to the enterprise. External users can dial the
number 56623000 to query internal extension number. External users can also dial the
number 56623000, and then the call is transferred to an internal user.
NOTE

This example uses the voice tone "Please dial the extension number, or dial zero for the operator."

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-15 Networking for configuring voice services for a small- or medium-sized enterprise

PSTN

AT0 trunk
Port 1/0/4
RouterA
Port 1/0/0

Port 1/0/2

Port 1/0/1
User A

User C
User B

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.

Set the service mode to PBX.

2.

Configure the default country code and area code.

3.

Configure the enterprise, DN set, and RTB file.

4.

Configure prefixes.

5.

Configure PBX users.

6.

Configure a trunk and a trunk group for inter-office calls.

7.

Configure a call route and a post-routing number change plan.

8.

Configure an IVR group.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l

Country code and region code: 86 and 25


NOTE

The country code and region code in China are used as an example.

Extension numbers of User A, User B, and User C: 800, 801, and 802 (the access number
of the IVR group is 800)

Enterprise that User A, User B, and User C belongs to: hw

DN set: local

Intra-office and inter-office call prefixes: 8 and 9

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Call-in and call-out permissions: 3

IVR group name and user-defined RBT file name: ivr1 and sss.wav
NOTE

If the user-defined RBT is used, ensure that the RBT file has been made and uploaded/downloaded
to the storage media

Procedure
Step 1 Set the service mode to PBX.
NOTE

The PBX functions are controlled by the license. By default, PBX functions are disabled on a newly
purchased device. To use the PBX functions, apply for and purchase the license from the Huawei local
office.
<RouterA> system-view
[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] service-mode pbx
Changing of the protocol configuration takes effect after you save the data and
then reboot the system. Are you sure to change the protocol configuration? (y/n
)[n] : y
[RouterA-voice] quit
[RouterA] quit
<RouterA> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? [y/n]y
<RouterA> reboot
Info: The system is now comparing the configuration, please wait.
System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

Step 2 Configure the default country code and area code.


[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] pbx default-country-code 86 default-area-code 25

Step 3 Configure the enterprise, DN set, and RTB file.


[RouterA-voice] enterprise hw
[RouterA-voice-enterprise-hw] dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-enterprise-hw] crbt-file flash:/sss.wav status pass
[RouterA-voice-enterprise-hw] quit

Step 4 Configure prefixes.


[RouterA-voice] callprefix 8
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-8]
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-8]
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-8]
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-8]
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-8]
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9]
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9]
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9]
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9]
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9]
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9]

enterprise hw dn-set local


prefix 8
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 3 4
quit
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 9
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 1 15
destination-location inter-office
quit

Step 5 Configure PBX users.


# Configure User A.
[RouterA-voice] pbxuser 800
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-800]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-800]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-800]

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 800
dn-set local

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-800] call-right in international-toll out internationaltoll


[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-800] service-right call-transfer enable
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-800] quit

# Configure User B.
[RouterA-voice] pbxuser 801
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-801]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-801]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-801]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-801]
toll
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-801]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 801
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out internationalquit

# Configure User C.
[RouterA-voice] pbxuser 802
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-802]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-802]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-802]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-802]
toll
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-802]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/2
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 802
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out internationalquit

Step 6 Configure a trunk and a trunk group.


[RouterA-voice] trunk-group at0 fxo
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-at0] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-at0] call-right in international-toll out internationaltoll
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-at0] trunk-at0 1/0/4 default-called-telno 800
reversepole-detect disable
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-at0] quit

Step 7 Configure a call route and a post-routing number change plan.


Configure a call route.
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] callroute trunkgroup1 at0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] quit

# Configure a post-routing number change plan.


[RouterA-voice] afterroute-change 9
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9]

callprefix 9
trunk-group at0
caller no-change
called del 7 1
quit

Step 8 Configure an IVR group.


[RouterA-voice] pbxusergroup ivr1 ivr enterprise hw
[RouterA-voice-ivr-group-ivr1] dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-ivr-group-ivr1] access-telno 800
[RouterA-voice-ivr-group-ivr1] console-telno 0
[RouterA-voice-ivr-group-ivr1] tone-id file flash:/sss.wav
[RouterA-voice-ivr-group-ivr1] group-member pbxuser 800
[RouterA-voice-ivr-group-ivr1] quit

Step 9 Verify the configuration.


1.

When external users dial the number 56623000, they can dial extension numbers to
communicate with internal users.

2.

User A, User B, and User C can call each other.

3.

User A, User B, and User C can make inter-office calls.

----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Configuration Files
Configuration file of RouterA
voice
pbx default-area-code 25
#
enterprise hw
crbt-file flash:/sss.wav status pass
dn-set local
#
r2 signalling-type argentina
#
r2 signalling-type brazil
#
r2 signalling-type mexico
#
r2 signalling-type standard
#
trunk-group at0 fxo
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
trunk-at0 1/0/4 default-called-telno 800 reversepole-detect disable
#
callprefix 8
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 8
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 3 4
destination-location inter-office
#
callprefix 9
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 9
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 1 15
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 at0
#
pbxuser 800 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno 800
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
#
pbxuser 801 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno 801
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
#
pbxuser 802 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/2
telno 802
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
#
pbxusergroup ivr1 ivr enterprise hw
dn-set local
access-telno 800
console-telno 2
tone-id file flash:/sss.wav
destination dn-set DefaultDialPlan
group-member pbxuser 800 member-index 1
#
afterroute-change 9
callprefix 9
trunk-group at0
caller no-change

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

called del 7 1
#
return

2.16.2 Example for Configuring the AR to Implement


Communication for Different Enterprises
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-16, enterprise A and enterprise B are located in the same industry park.
User A and User B belong to enterprise A, and User C and User D belong to enterprise B. The
AR logically isolates voice services of the two enterprises. Internal calls of the enterprises are
connected through their respective virtual PBXs on the AR, and outgoing calls from the
enterprises are connected to external users through one port. This networking helps enterprises
lower investment on equipment and reduces the number of access nodes on the carrier network.
The requirements are as follows:
l

The carrier allocates the number 56623000 to enterprise A. If external users dial the number
56623000, the phone of User A rings and the call transfer service is enabled. When external
users call other internal users, the phone of User A transfers the calls.

The carrier allocates the number 56623001 to enterprise B. If external users dial the number
56623001, the phone of User C rings and the call transfer service is enabled. When external
users call other internal users, the phone of User C transfers the calls.

Figure 2-16 Networking for configuring the AR to implement communication for different
enterprises

IMS/IP
network

Trunk
Router Eth2/0/0
Port 1/0/0

User A

Port
1/0/1

Port 1/0/3
Port
1/0/2

User B

User D
User C

Enterprise A

Enterprise B

Campus network

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.

Set the service mode to PBX.

2.

Configure signaling and media IP addresses.

3.

Configure the default country code and area code.

4.

Configure the enterprise and DN set.

5.

Configure the SIP server.

6.

Configure prefixes.

7.

Configure PBX users.

8.

Configure trunks, trunk groups, and routes for inter-office calls.

9.

Configure call routes and post-routing number change plans.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l

Country code and region code: 86 and 25


NOTE

The country code and region code in China are used as an example.

Numbers of User A, User B, User C, and User D: 2000, 2001, 3000, and 3001

Signaling and media IP addresses: 192.168.1.3

Enterprise huawei to which user A belongs, DN set local, intra-office call prefix 2, and
inter-office call prefix 8

Enterprise huawei to which user B belongs, DN set local1, intra-office call prefix 3, and
inter-office call prefix 9

IP address and port number of the IMS: 192.168.1.1 and 5060

Procedure
Step 1 Set the service mode to PBX.
NOTE

The PBX functions are controlled by the license. By default, PBX functions are disabled on a newly
purchased device. To use the PBX functions, apply for and purchase the license from the Huawei local
office.
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] voice
[Huawei-voice] service-mode pbx
Changing of the protocol configuration takes effect after you save the data and
then reboot the system. Are you sure to change the protocol configuration? (y/n
)[n] : y
[Huawei-voice] quit
[Huawei] quit
<Huawei> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? [y/n]y
<Huawei> reboot
Info: The system is now comparing the configuration, please wait.
System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 2 Configure signaling and media IP addresses.


# Configure an IP address pool.
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] interface ethernet2/0/0
[Huawei-Ethernet2/0/0] ip address 192.168.1.3 24
[Huawei-Ethernet2/0/0] quit

# Configure signaling and media IP addresses.


[Huawei] voice
[Huawei-voice] voip-address signalling interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.3
[Huawei-voice] voip-address media interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.3

Step 3 Configure the default country code and area code.


[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] pbx default-country-code 86 default-area-code 25

Step 4 Configure the enterprise and DN set.


[Huawei-voice] enterprise hw
[Huawei-voice-enterprise-hw] dn-set local
[Huawei-voice-enterprise-hw] quit
[Huawei-voice] enterprise hw1
[Huawei-voice-enterprise-hw1] dn-set local1
[Huawei-voice-enterprise-hw1] quit

Step 5 Configure a SIP server.


[Huawei-voice] sipserver
[Huawei-voice-sipserver] signalling-address ip 192.168.1.3 port 5060
[Huawei-voice-sipserver] media-ip 192.168.1.3
[Huawei-voice-sipserver] register-uri huawei.com
[Huawei-voice-sipserver] home-domain huawei.com
[Huawei-voice-sipserver] reset
SIP server reset succeeds.
[Huawei-voice-sipserver] quit

Step 6 Configure prefixes.


[Huawei-voice] callprefix 2
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-2]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-2]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-2]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-2]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-2]
[Huawei-voice] callprefix 8
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-8]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-8]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-8]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-8]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-8]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-8]
[Huawei-voice] callprefix 3
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-3]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-3]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-3]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-3]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-3]
[Huawei-voice] callprefix 9
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-9]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-9]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-9]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-9]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-9]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-9]

enterprise hw dn-set local


prefix 2
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 4 8
quit
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 8
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 1 15
destination-location inter-office
quit
enterprise hw1 dn-set local1
prefix 3
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 4 8
quit
enterprise hw1 dn-set local1
prefix 9
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 1 15
destination-location inter-office
quit

Step 7 Configure PBX users.


# Configure User A.
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice
[Huawei-voice] pbxuser 2000
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2000]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2000]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2000]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2000]
toll
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2000]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2000]

2 PBX Configuration
pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 2000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out internationalservice-right call-transfer enable
quit

# Configure User B.
[Huawei-voice] pbxuser 2001
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2001]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2001]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2001]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2001]
toll
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-2001]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 2001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out internationalquit

# Configure User C.
[Huawei-voice] pbxuser 3000
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3000]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3000]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3000]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3000]
toll
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3000]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3000]

pots enterprise hw1


port 1/0/2
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 3000
dn-set local1
call-right in international-toll out internationalservice-right call-transfer enable
quit

# Configure User D.
[Huawei-voice] pbxuser 3001
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3001]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3001]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3001]
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3001]
toll
[Huawei-voice-pbxuser-3001]

pots enterprise hw1


port 1/0/3
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 3001
dn-set local1
call-right in international-toll out internationalquit

Step 8 Configure trunks, trunk groups, and routes.


# Configure a SIP AT0 trunk group.
[Huawei-voice] trunk-group sipat0 sip trunk-circuit
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] enterprise hw dn-set local
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] call-right in international-toll out
international-toll
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] default-caller-telno 2000
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] signalling-address ip 192.168.1.3 port 5070
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] media-ip 192.168.1.3
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] peer-address static 192.168.1.1 5060
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] register-uri huawei.com
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] home-domain huawei.com
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] register-id
56623000
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] trunk-sipat0 56623000 default-called-telno 2000
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] reset
Note: Trunkgroup reset succeeds.
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat0] quit
[Huawei-voice] trunk-group sipat01 sip trunk-circuit
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01] enterprise hw1 dn-set local1
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01] call-right in international-toll out
international-toll
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01] default-caller-telno 3000
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01] signalling-address ip 192.168.1.3 port 5080
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01] callout-right 3
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01] media-ip 192.168.1.3
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01] peer-address static 192.168.1.1 5060
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01] register-uri huawei.com

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01]
huawei.com
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01]
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01]
3000
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01]
Note: Trunkgroup reset succeeds.
[Huawei-voice-trunkgroup-sipat01]

home-domain
register-id 56623001
trunk-sipat0 56623001 default-called-telno
reset
quit

Step 9 Configure call routes and post-routing number change plans.


# Configure call routes.
[Huawei-voice] callprefix 8
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-8]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-8]
[Huawei-voice] callprefix 9
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-9]
[Huawei-voice-callprefix-9]

callroute trunkgroup1 sipat0


quit
callroute trunkgroup1 sipat01
quit

# Configure post-routing number change plans.


[RouterA-voice] afterroute-change 8
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-8]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-8]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-8]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-8]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-8]
[RouterA-voice] afterroute-change 9
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9]

callprefix 8
trunk-group sipat0
caller no-change
called del 7 1
quit
callprefix 9
trunk-group sipat01
caller no-change
called del 7 1
quit

Step 10 Verify the configuration.


1.

User A and User B can talk with each other.

2.

User C and User D can talk with each other.

3.

User A, User B, User C, and User D can call external users.

4.

When dialing the number 56623000, external users can talk with User A and User B.

5.

When dialing the number 56623001, external users can talk with User C and User D.

----End

Configuration Files
Configuration file of the router
#
voice
voip-address signalling interface Ethernet 0/0/1 192.168.1.3
voip-address media interface Ethernet 0/0/1 192.168.1.3
pbx default-area-code 25
#
dspattribute
#
enterprise hw
dn-set local
#
enterprise hw1
dn-set local1
#
sipserver
signalling-address ip 192.168.1.3 port 5060
media-ip 192.168.1.3

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

register-uri huawei.com
home-domain huawei.com
#
r2 signalling-type argentina
#
r2 signalling-type brazil
#
r2 signalling-type mexico
#
r2 signalling-type standard
#
trunk-group sipat0 sip trunk-circuit
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
default-caller-telno 2000
signalling-address ip 192.168.1.3 port 5070
media-ip 192.168.1.3
peer-address static 192.168.1.1 5060
register-uri huawei.com
home-domain huawei.com
register-id 56623000
trunk-sipat0 56623000 default-called-telno 2000
#
trunk-group sipat01 sip trunk-circuit
enterprise hw1 dn-set local1
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
default-caller-telno 3000
signalling-address ip 192.168.1.3 port 5080
media-ip 192.168.1.3
peer-address static 192.168.1.1 5060
register-uri huawei.com
home-domain huawei.com
register-id 56623001
trunk-sipat0 56623001 default-called-telno 3000
#
callprefix 2
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 2
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 4 8
#
callprefix 3
enterprise hw1 dn-set local1
prefix 3
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 4 8
#
callprefix 8
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 8
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 1 15
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 sipat0
#
callprefix 9
enterprise hw1 dn-set local1
prefix 9
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 1 15
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 sipat01
#
pbxuser 2000 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno 2000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
#

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

afterroute-change 8
callprefix 8
trunk-group sipat0
caller no-change
called del 7 1
#
afterroute-change 9
callprefix 9
trunk-group sipat01
caller no-change
called del 7 1
#
return

2.16.3 Example for Using an H.323 Trunk Group in Peer Mode to


Configure Calls Between the Headquarters and Branch
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-17, the headquarters and branch of enterprise A are located in different
areas. RouterA and RouterB function as gateways and are connected through the H323 trunk.
After voice services are deployed on RouterA and RouterB, enterprise users can use the voice
services across areas. Internal users use the AT0 trunk to call external users.
l

The carrier allocates the number 56623000 to the enterprise headquarters. If external users
dial the number 56623000, the phone of User A rings and the call transfer service is enabled.
When external users call other internal users, the phone of User A transfers the calls.

The carrier allocates the number 28963000 to the enterprise branch. If external users dial
the number 28963000, the phone of User C rings and the call transfer service is enabled.
When external users call other internal users, the phone of User C transfers the calls.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-17 Networking diagram for configuring calls between the headquarters and branch

Enterprise A

Branch
User C

User D

Port1/0/0
Router B

Port1/0/1

Port1/0/4

Eth2/0/0
PSTN

H323 trunk

IP network
PSTN
H323 trunk
Eth2/0/0

Port1/0/4

Router A
Port1/0/0

Port1/0/1

User A

User B

Enterprise A

Headquarters

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.

Set the service mode to PBX.

2.

Configure signaling and media IP addresses.

3.

Configure a country code and a region code.

4.

Configure the enterprise and DN set.

5.

Set H323 system parameters.

6.

Configure prefixes.

7.

Configure PBX users.

8.

Configure trunks, trunk groups, and routes for inter-office calls.

9.

Configure a call route and post-routing number change.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Country code 86, area code 25 of Router A, and area code 755 of Router B
NOTE

The country code and region code in China are used as an example. During deployment, configure
the country code and region code based on actual networking.

Number of user A: 22223000

Number of user B: 22223001

Number of user C: 33333000

Number of user D: 33333001

Media and signaling IP address of the headquarters: 192.168.1.1

Media and signaling IP address of the branch: 192.168.1.2

Enterprise hw to which user A and user B belong, DN set local, call prefix 2222, interoffice prefix 9 of the AT0 trunk, and inter-office prefix 20000 between the headquarters
and branch

Enterprise hw to which user C and user D belong, DN set local, call prefix 3333, interoffice prefix 9 of the AT0 trunk, and inter-office prefix 20000 between the headquarters
and branch

Procedure
Step 1 Set the service mode to PBX on RouterA and RouterB.
NOTE

The PBX functions are controlled by the license. By default, PBX functions are disabled on a newly
purchased device. To use the PBX functions, apply for and purchase the license from the Huawei local
office.

# Configure RouterA to work in PBX mode.


<RouterA> system-view
[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] service-mode pbx
Changing of the protocol configuration takes effect after you save the data and
then reboot the system. Are you sure to change the protocol configuration? (y/n
)[n] : y
[RouterA-voice] quit
[RouterA] quit
<RouterA> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? [y/n]y
<RouterA> reboot
Info: The system is now comparing the configuration, please wait.
System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

# Configure RouterB to work in PBX mode.


<RouterB> system-view
[RouterB] voice
[RouterB-voice] service-mode pbx
Changing of the protocol configuration takes effect after you save the data and
then reboot the system. Are you sure to change the protocol configuration? (y/n
)[n] : y
[RouterB-voice] quit
[RouterB] quit
<RouterB> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? [Y/N]y
<RouterB> reboot
Info: The system is now comparing the configuration, please wait.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y


Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

Step 2 Configure signaling and media IP addresses.


# Configure signaling and media IP addresses on RouterA.
l Configure a signaling IP address.
<RouterA> system-view
[RouterA] interface ethernet 2/0/0
[RouterA-Ethernet2/0/0] ip address 192.168.1.1 24
[RouterA-Ethernet2/0/0] quit

l Configure a media IP address.


[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] voip-address signalling interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice] voip-address media interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.1

# Configure signaling and media IP addresses on RouterB.


l Configure a signaling IP address.
<RouterB> system-view
[RouterB] interface ethernet 2/0/0
[RouterB-Ethernet2/0/0] ip address 192.168.1.2 24
[RouterB-Ethernet2/0/0] quit

l Configure a media IP address.


[RouterB] voice
[RouterB-voice] voip-address signalling interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.2
[RouterB-voice] voip-address media interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.2

Step 3 Configure a country code and a region code.


# Configure RouterA.
[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] pbx default-country-code 86 default-area-code 25

# Configure RouterB.
[RouterB] voice
[RouterB-voice] pbx default-country-code 86 default-area-code 755

Step 4 Configure the enterprise, centrex group, and DN set.


# Configure RouterA.
[RouterA-voice] enterprise hw
[RouterA-voice-enterprise-hw] dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-enterprise-hw] quit

# Configure RouterB.
[RouterB-voice] enterprise hw
[RouterB-voice-enterprise-hw] dn-set local
[RouterB-voice-enterprise-hw] quit

Step 5 Set H323 attribute.


# Set H323 attribute on RouterA.
[RouterA-voice] h323-attribute
[RouterA-voice-h323-attribute] localip 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice-h323-attribute] reset
H323 system parameters reset successfully!
[RouterA-voice-h323-attribute] quit

# Set H323 attribute on RouterB.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

[RouterB-voice] h323-attribute
[RouterB-voice-h323-attribute] localip 192.168.1.2
[RouterB-voice-h323-attribute] reset
H323 system parameters reset successfully!
[RouterA-voice-h323-attribute] quit

Step 6 Configure prefixes.


# Configure prefixes on RouterA.
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 2222
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] prefix 2222
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] digit-length 8 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] quit
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] prefix 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] digit-length 1 15
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] destination-location inter-office
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] quit
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 20000
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] prefix 20000
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] digit-length 5 20
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] destination-location inter-office
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] quit

# Configure prefixes on RouterB.


[RouterB-voice] callprefix 3333
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-3333] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-3333] prefix 3333
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-3333] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-3333] digit-length 8 9
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-3333] quit
[RouterB-voice] callprefix 9
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] prefix 9
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] destination-location inter-office
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] digit-length 1 15
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] quit
[RouterB-voice] callprefix 20000
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] prefix 20000
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] digit-length 5 20
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] destination-location inter-office
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] quit

Step 7 Configure PBX users.


# Configure user A.
[RouterA-voice] pbxuser 22223000
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 22223000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out
service-right call-transfer enable
quit

# Configure user B.
[RouterA-voice] pbxuser 22223001 pots enterprise hw
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001] port 1/0/1

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]

2 PBX Configuration
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 22223001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out
quit

# Configure user C.
[RouterB-voice] pbxuser 33333000
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]
international-toll
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno country-code 86 area-code 755 33333000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out
service-right call-transfer enable
quit

# Configure user D.
[RouterB-voice] pbxuser 33333001
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333001]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333001]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333001]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333001]
international-toll
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno country-code 86 area-code 755 33333001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out
quit

Step 8 Configure trunk groups and routes.


# Configure trunk groups and routes on RouterA.
l Configure an H323 trunk group.
[RouterA-voice] trunk-group h323 h323 symmetrical
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] call-right in international-toll out
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] signalling-ip ip 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] media-ip 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] peer-address 192.168.1.2 1720
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] quit

l Configure an AT0 trunk group.


[RouterA-voice] trunk-group at0 fxo
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-at0] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-at0] call-right in international-toll out
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-at0] trunk-at0 1/0/4 default-called-telno 22223000
reversepole-detect disable

l Configure a call route.


[RouterA-voice] callprefix 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] callroute trunkgroup1 at0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] quit
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 20000
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] callroute trunkgroup1 h323
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] quit

# Configure trunks, trunk groups, and routes on RouterB.


l Configure an H323 trunk group.
[RouterB-voice] trunk-group h323 h323 symmetrical
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] call-right in international-toll out
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] signalling-ip ip 192.168.1.2
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] media-ip 192.168.1.2
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] peer-address static 192.168.1.1 1720

l Configure an AT0 trunk group.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

[RouterB-voice] trunk-group at0 fxo


[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-at0] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-at0] call-right in international-toll out
international-toll
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-at0] trunk-at0 1/0/4 default-called-telno 33333000
reversepole-detect disable

l Configure a call route.


[RouterB-voice] callprefix 9
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] callroute trunkgroup1 at0
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] quit
[RouterB-voice] callprefix 20000
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] callroute trunkgroup1 h323
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] quit

Step 9 Configure post-routing number change.


# Configure post-routing number change on RouterA.
[RouterA-voice] afterroute-change 9
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9] callprefix 9
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9] trunk-group at0
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9] caller no-change
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9] called del 7 1
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9] quit
[RouterA-voice] afterroute-change 20000
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000] callprefix 20000
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000] trunk-group h323
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000] caller no-change
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000] called del 7 5

# Configure post-routing number change on RouterB.


[RouterA-voice] afterroute-change 9
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-9] callprefix 9
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-9] trunk-group at0
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-9] caller no-change
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-9] called del 8 1
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-9] quit
[RouterB-voice] afterroute-change 20000
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-20000] callprefix 20000
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-20000] trunk-group h323
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-20000] caller no-change
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-20000] called del 8 5
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-20000] quit

Step 10 Verify the configuration.


1.

User A and user B can talk with each other.

2.

User C and user D can talk with each other.

3.

User A, user B, user C, and user D can call external users.

4.

When dialing the number 56623000, external users can talk with user A and user B.

5.

When dialing the number 28963000, external users can talk with user C and user D.

----End

Configuration Files
# Configuration file of RouterA
#
voice
voip-address signalling interface Ethernet 0/0/1 192.168.1.1
voip-address media interface Ethernet 0/0/1 192.168.1.1
sip-reg-count-per-second 4294967295
pbx default-area-code 25
#
h323-

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

attribute
localip 192.168.1.1
#
enterprise hw
dn-set local
#
r2 signalling-type argentina
#
r2 signalling-type brazil
#
r2 signalling-type mexico
#
r2 signalling-type standard
#
trunk-group at0 fxo
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
trunk-at0 1/0/4 default-called-telno 22223000 reversepole-detect disable
#
trunk-group h323 h323 symmetrical
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
signalling-ip ip 192.168.1.1
media-ip 192.168.1.1
peer-address static 192.168.1.2 1720
#
callprefix 9
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 9
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 1 15
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 at0
#
callprefix 2222
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 2222
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 8 9
#
callprefix 20000
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 20000
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 5 20
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 h323
#
pbxuser 22223000 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno 22223000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
service-right call-transfer enable
#
pbxuser 22223001 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno 22223001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
#
afterroute-change 9
callprefix 9
trunk-group at0
caller no-change
called del 7 1
#
afterroute-change 20000
callprefix 20000

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

trunk-group h323
caller no-change
called del 7 5
#
return

# Configuration file of RouterB


#
voice
voip-address signalling interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 192.168.1.2
voip-address media interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 192.168.1.2
sip-reg-count-per-second 4294967295
#
h323attribute
localip 192.168.1.2
#
enterprise hw
dn-set local
#
r2 signalling-type argentina
#
r2 signalling-type brazil
#
r2 signalling-type mexico
#
r2 signalling-type standard
#
trunk-group at0 fxo
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
trunk-at0 1/0/4 default-called-telno 33333000 reversepole-detect disable
#
trunk-group h323 h323 symmetrical
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
signalling-ip ip 192.168.1.2
media-ip 192.168.1.2
peer-address static 192.168.1.1 1720
#
callprefix 9
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 9
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 1 15
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 at0
#
callprefix 3333
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 3333
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 8 9
#
callprefix 20000
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 20000
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 5 20
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 h323
#
pbxuser 33333000 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno 33333000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
service-right call-transfer enable
#
pbxuser 33333001 pots enterprise hw

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

port 1/0/1
telno 33333001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
#
afterroute-change 9
callprefix 9
trunk-group at0
caller no-change
called del 8 1
#
afterroute-change 20000
callprefix 20000
trunk-group h323
caller no-change
called del 8 5
#
return

2.16.4 Example for Using an H.323 Trunk Group in Registration


Mode to Configure Calls Between the Headquarters and Branch
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-18, the headquarters and branch of enterprise A are located in different
areas. RouterA functions as the gateway, and RouterB is a non-Huawei device and functions as
the gatekeeper. RouterA and RouterB are connected through the H323 trunk. After voice services
are deployed on RouterA and RouterB, enterprise users can use the voice services across areas.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-18 Networking diagram for configuring calls between the headquarters and branch

Enterprise A

Branch
User C

User D

Port1/0/0
Router B
H323 trunk

Port1/0/1
Eth2/0/0

IP network

Eth2/0/0

H323 trunk

Router A
Port1/0/0

Port1/0/1

User A

User B

Enterprise A

Headquarters

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.

Set the service mode to PBX.

2.

Configure signaling and media IP addresses.

3.

Configure a country code and a region code.

4.

Configure the enterprise and DN set.

5.

Set H323 attribute.

6.

Configure prefixes.

7.

Configure PBX users.

8.

Configure trunk groups and routes for inter-office calls.

9.

Configure a call route and post-routing number change.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data (data of Router A):
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Country code and region code: 86 and 25


NOTE

The country code and region code in China are used as an example. During deployment, configure
the country code and region code based on actual networking.

Number of user A: 22223000 and number of user B: 22223001 Number of user C: 33333000
and number of user D: 33333001

Signaling and media IP addresses and signaling port number of the headquarters:
192.168.1.1 Signaling and media IP addresses and signaling port number of the branch:
192.168.1.2

Enterprise huawei to which user A and user B belong, DN set local, call prefix 2222, and
inter-office prefix 20000 between the headquarters and branch

Procedure
Step 1 Configure RouterA to work in PBX mode.
NOTE

l The PBX functions are controlled by the license. By default, PBX functions are disabled on a newly
purchased device. To use the PBX functions, apply for and purchase the license from the Huawei local
office.
l The preceding configuration is the configuration of RouterA.

# Configure RouterA to work in PBX mode.


<RouterA> system-view
[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] service-mode pbx
Changing of the protocol configuration takes effect after you save the data and
then reboot the system. Are you sure to change the protocol configuration? (y/n
)[n] : y
[RouterA-voice] quit
[RouterA] quit
<RouterA> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? [y/n]y
<RouterA> reboot
Info: The system is now comparing the configuration, please wait.
System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

Step 2 Configure signaling and media IP addresses on RouterA.


l Configure a signaling IP address.
<RouterA> system-view
[RouterA] interface ethernet 2/0/0
[RouterA-Ethernet2/0/0] ip address 192.168.1.1 24
[RouterA-Ethernet2/0/0] quit

l Configure a media IP address.


[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] voip-address signalling interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice] voip-address media interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.1

Step 3 Configure a country code and a region code.


# Configure RouterA.
[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] pbx default-country-code 86 default-area-code 25

Step 4 Configure the enterprise, centrex group, and DN set.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

# Configure RouterA.
[RouterA-voice] enterprise hw
[RouterA-voice-enterprise-hw] dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-enterprise-hw] quit

Step 5 Set H323 attribute.


[RouterA-voice] h323-attribute
[RouterA-voice-h323-attribute] localip 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice-h323-attribute] reset
H323 attribute reset successfully!
[RouterA-voice-h323-attribute] quit

Step 6 Configure prefixes.


[RouterA-voice] callprefix 2222
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] prefix 2222
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] digit-length 8 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] quit
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 20000
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] prefix 20000
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] digit-length 5 20
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] destination-location inter-office
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] quit

Step 7 Configure PBX users.


# Configure user A.
[RouterA-voice] pbxuser 22223000
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 22223000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out
service-right call-transfer enable
quit

# Configure user B.
[RouterA-voice] pbxuser 22223001
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 22223001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out
quit

Step 8 Configure trunks, trunk groups, and routes.


l Configure an H323 trunk group.
NOTE

The same gateway ID must be configured on devices of the headquarters and branch.
[RouterA-voice] trunk-group h323 h323 register-gateway
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] call-right in international-toll out
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] gwid h323
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] signalling-ip ip 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] media-ip 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-h323] quit

l Configure a call route.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

[RouterA-voice] callprefix 20000


[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] callroute trunkgroup1 h323
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] quit

Step 9 Configure post-routing number change.


[RouterA-voice] afterroute-change 20000
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000]
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000]

callprefix 20000
trunk-group h323
caller no-change
called del 7 5

Step 10 Verify the configuration.


1.

User A and user B can talk with each other.

2.

User A and user B can talk with user C and user D.

----End

Configuration Files
# Configuration file of RouterA
#
voice
voip-address signalling interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 192.168.1.1
voip-address media interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 192.168.1.1
sip-reg-count-per-second 4294967295
pbx default-area-code 25
#
h323attribute
localip 192.168.1.1
#
enterprise hw
dn-set local
#
r2 signalling-type argentina
#
r2 signalling-type brazil
#
r2 signalling-type mexico
#
r2 signalling-type standard
#
trunk-group h323 h323 register-gateway
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
signalling-ip ip 192.168.1.1
media-ip 192.168.1.1
gwid h323
#
callprefix 2222
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 2222
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 8 9
#
callprefix 20000
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 20000
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 5 20
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 h323
#
pbxuser 22223000 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno 22223000

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
service-right call-transfer enable
#
pbxuser 22223001 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno 22223001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
#
afterroute-change 20000
callprefix 20000
trunk-group h323
caller no-change
called del 7 5
#
return

2.16.5 Example for Using the SIP Trunk Group to Configure Calls
Between the Headquarters and Branch
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-19, the headquarters and branch of enterprise A are located in different
areas. RouterA and RouterB use SIP trunks to connect the headquarters and branch. After voice
services are deployed on RouterA and RouterB, enterprise users can use the voice services across
areas.Internal users call external users through the AT0 trunk. The requirements are as follows:
l

The carrier allocates the number 56623000 to the enterprise headquarters. If external users
dial the number 56623000, the phone of User A rings and the call transfer service is enabled.
When external users call other internal users, the phone of User A transfers the calls.

The carrier allocates the number 28963000 to the enterprise branch. If external users dial
the number 28963000, the phone of User C rings and the call transfer service is enabled.
When external users call other internal users, the phone of User C transfers the calls.

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Figure 2-19 Networking for configuring communication between the headquarters and branch

Enterprise A

Branch
User C

User D

Port1/0/0

Port1/0/1
Router B

Port1/0/4

Eth2/0/0
SIP trunk

PSTN
IP network

PSTN

SIP trunk
Port1/0/4

Eth2/0/0
Router A
Port1/0/0

Port1/0/1

User A

User B

Enterprise A

Headquarters

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1.

Set the service mode to PBX.

2.

Configure signaling and media IP addresses.

3.

Configure the default country code and area code.

4.

Configure the enterprise and DN set.

5.

Configure the SIP server.

6.

Configure prefixes.

7.

Configure PBX users.

8.

Configure trunks, trunk groups, and routes for inter-office calls.

9.

Configure call routes and post-routing number change plans.

Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Country code 86, area code 2 of Router A, and area code 755 of Router B
NOTE

The country code and region code in China are used as an example.

Internal numbers of User A, User B, User C, and User D: 22223000, 22223001, 33333000,
and 33333001

Signaling and media IP addresses and signaling port number of the headquarters:
192.168.1.1 and 5070

Signaling and media IP addresses and signaling port number of the branch: 192.168.1.2
and 5070

Enterprise huawei to which user A and user B belong, DN set local, call prefix 2222, interoffice call prefix 9 of the AT0 trunk, and inter-office call prefix 20000 between the
headquarters and branch

Enterprise huawei to which user C and user D belong, DN set local, call prefix 3333, interoffice call prefix 9 of the AT0 trunk, and inter-office call prefix 20000 between the
headquarters and branch

Procedure
Step 1 Set the service mode to PBX on RouterA and RouterB.
NOTE

The PBX functions are controlled by the license. By default, PBX functions are disabled on a newly
purchased device. To use the PBX functions, apply for and purchase the license from the Huawei local
office.

# Configure RouterA to work in PBX mode.


<RouterA> system-view
[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] service-mode pbx
Changing of the protocol configuration takes effect after you save the data and
then reboot the system. Are you sure to change the protocol configuration? (y/n
)[n] : y
[RouterA-voice] quit
[RouterA] quit
<RouterA> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? [y/n]y
<RouterA> reboot
Info: The system is now comparing the configuration, please wait.
System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

# Configure RouterB to work in PBX mode.


<RouterB> system-view
[RouterB] voice
[RouterB-voice] service-mode pbx
Changing of the protocol configuration takes effect after you save the data and
then reboot the system. Are you sure to change the protocol configuration? (y/n
)[n] : y
[RouterB-voice] quit
[RouterB] quit
<RouterB> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue? [Y/N]y
<RouterB> reboot
Info: The system is now comparing the configuration, please wait.
System will reboot! Continue ? [y/n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait...

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Step 2 Configure signaling and media IP addresses.


# Configure signaling and media IP addresses on RouterA.
l Configure a signaling IP address.
<RouterA> system-view
[RouterA] interface ethernet 2/0/0
[RouterA-Ethernet2/0/0] ip address 192.168.1.1 24
[RouterA-Ethernet2/0/0] quit

l Configure a media IP address.


[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] voip-address signalling interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice] voip-address media interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.1

# Configure signaling and media IP addresses on RouterB.


l Configure a signaling IP address.
<RouterB> system-view
[RouterB] interface ethernet 2/0/0
[RouterB-Ethernet2/0/0] ip address 192.168.1.2 24
[RouterB-Ethernet2/0/0] quit

l Configure a media IP address.


[RouterB] voice
[RouterB-voice] voip-address signalling interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.2
[RouterB-voice] voip-address media interface ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.2

Step 3 Configure the default country code and area code.


# Configure the default country code and area code on RouterA.
[RouterA] voice
[RouterA-voice] pbx default-country-code 86 default-area-code 25

# Configure the default country code and area code on RouterB.


[RouterB] voice
[RouterB-voice] pbx default-country-code 86 default-area-code 755

Step 4 Configure the enterprise and DN set.


# Configure RouterA.
[RouterA-voice] pbx
[RouterA-voice] enterprise hw
[RouterA-voice-enterprise-hw] dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-enterprise-hw] quit

# Configure RouterB.
[RouterB-voice] pbx
[RouterB-voice] enterprise hw
[RouterB-voice-enterprise-hw] dn-set local
[RouterB-voice-enterprise-hw] quit

Step 5 Configure a SIP server.


# Configure RouterA as the SIP server.
[RouterA-voice] sipserver
[RouterA-voice-sipserver] signalling-address ip 192.168.1.1 port 5060
[RouterA-voice-sipserver] media-ip 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice-sipserver] register-uri huawei.com
[RouterA-voice-sipserver] home-domain huawei.com
[RouterA-voice-sipserver] reset
SIP server reset succeeds.
[RouterA-voice-sipserver] quit

# Configure RouterB as the SIP server.


Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

[RouterB-voice] sipserver
[RouterB-voice-sipserver] signalling-address ip 192.168.1.2 port 5060
[RouterB-voice-sipserver] media-ip 192.168.1.2
[RouterB-voice-sipserver] register-uri huawei.com
[RouterB-voice-sipserver] home-domain huawei.com
[RouterB-voice-sipserver] reset
SIP server reset succeeds.
[RouterB-voice-sipserver] quit

Step 6 Configure prefixes.


# Configure prefixes on RouterA.
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 2222
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] prefix 2222
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] digit-length 8 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-2222] quit
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] prefix 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] digit-length 1 15
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] destination-location inter-office
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] quit
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 20000
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] prefix 20000
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] digit-length 5 20
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] destination-location inter-office
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] quit

# Configure prefixes on RouterB.


[RouterB-voice] callprefix 3333
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-3333] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-3333] prefix 3333
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-3333] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-3333] digit-length 8 9
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-3333] quit
[RouterB-voice] callprefix 9
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] prefix 9
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] destination-location inter-office
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] digit-length 1 15
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] quit
[RouterB-voice] callprefix 20000
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] prefix 20000
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] call-type category basic-service attribute 0
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] digit-length 5 20
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] destination-location inter-office
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] quit

Step 7 Configure PBX users.


# Configure User A.
[RouterA-voice] pbxuser 22223000
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223000]

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 22223000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out
service-right call-transfer enable
quit

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

# Configure User B.
[RouterA-voice] pbxuser 22223001
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-pbxuser-22223001]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno country-code 86 area-code 25 22223001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out
quit

# Configure User C.
[RouterB-voice] pbxuser 33333000
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]
international-toll
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333000]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-22223001]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno country-code 86 area-code 755 33333000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out
service-right call-transfer enable
quit

# Configure User D.
[RouterB-voice] pbxuser 33333001
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333001]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333001]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333001]
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-33333001]
international-toll
[RouterB-voice-pbxuser-22223001]

pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno country-code 86 area-code 755 33333001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out
quit

Step 8 Configure trunks, trunk groups, and routes.


# Configure trunks, trunk groups, and routes on RouterA.
l Configure a SIP trunk group.
[RouterA-voice] trunk-group sipip sip no-register
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] call-right in international-toll out
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] signalling-address ip 192.168.1.1 port 5070
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] media-ip 192.168.1.1
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] peer-address static 192.168.1.2 5070
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] register-uri huawei.com
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] home-domain huawei.com
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] reset
Note: Trunkgroup reset succeeds.
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] quit

l Configure an AT0 trunk group.


[RouterA-voice] trunk-group at0 fxo
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-at0] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-at0] call-right in international-toll out
international-toll
[RouterA-voice-trunkgroup-at0] trunk-at0 1/0/4 default-called-telno 22223000
reversepole-detect disable

l Configure a call route.


[RouterA-voice] callprefix 9
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] callroute trunkgroup1 at0
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-9] quit
[RouterA-voice] callprefix 20000
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] callroute trunkgroup1 sipip
[RouterA-voice-callprefix-20000] quit

# Configure trunks, trunk groups, and routes on RouterB.


l Configure a SIP trunk group.
[RouterB-voice] trunk-group sipip sip no-register
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] enterprise hw dn-set local

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] call-right in international-toll out


international-toll
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] signalling-address ip 192.168.1.2 port 5070
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] media-ip 192.168.1.2
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] peer-address static 192.168.1.1 5070
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] register-uri huawei.com
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] home-domain huawei.com
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] reset
Note: Trunkgroup reset succeeds.
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-sipip] quit

l Configure an AT0 trunk group.


[RouterB-voice] trunk-group at0 fxo
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-at0] enterprise hw dn-set local
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-at0] call-right in international-toll out
international-toll
[RouterB-voice-trunkgroup-at0] trunk-at0 1/0/4 default-called-telno 33333000
reversepole-detect disable

l Configure a call route.


[RouterB-voice] callprefix 9
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] callroute trunkgroup1 at0
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-9] quit
[RouterB-voice] callprefix 20000
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] callroute trunkgroup1 sipip
[RouterB-voice-callprefix-20000] quit

Step 9 Configure post-routing number change.


# Configure post-routing number change on RouterA.
[RouterA-voice] afterroute-change 9
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9] callprefix 9
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9] trunk-group at0
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9] caller no-change
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9] called del 7 1
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-9] quit
[RouterA-voice] afterroute-change 20000
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000] callprefix 20000
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000] trunk-group sipip
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000] caller no-change
[RouterA-voice-afterroute-change-20000] called del 7 5

# Configure post-routing number change on RouterB.


[RouterA-voice] afterroute-change 9
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-9] callprefix 9
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-9] trunk-group at0
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-9] caller no-change
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-9] called del 8 1
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-9] quit
[RouterB-voice] afterroute-change 20000
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-20000] callprefix 20000
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-20000] trunk-group sipip
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-20000] caller no-change
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-20000] called del 8 5
[RouterB-voice-afterroute-change-20000] quit

Step 10 Verify the configuration.


1.

User A and User B can talk with each other.

2.

User C and User D can talk with each other.

3.

User A, User B, User C, and User D can call external users.

4.

When dialing the number 56623000, external users can talk with User A and User B.

5.

When dialing the number 28963000, external users can talk with User C and User D.

----End
Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

Configuration Files
# Configuration file of RouterA
voice
voip-address media interface Ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.1
voip-address signalling interface Ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.1
pbx default-area-code 25
#
dspattribute
#
enterprise hw
dn-set local
#
sipserver
signalling-address ip 192.168.1.1 port 5060
media-ip 192.168.1.1
register-uri huawei.com
home-domain huawei.com
#
r2 signalling-type argentina
#
r2 signalling-type brazil
#
r2 signalling-type mexico
#
r2 signalling-type standard
#
trunk-group at0 fxo
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
trunk-at0 1/0/4 default-called-telno 22223000 reversepole-detect disable
#
trunk-group sipip sip no-register
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
signalling-address ip 192.168.1.1 port 5070
media-ip 192.168.1.1
peer-address static 192.168.1.2 5070
register-uri huawei.com
home-domain huawei.com
#
callprefix 9
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 9
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 1 15
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 at0
#
callprefix 2222
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 2222
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 8 9
#
callprefix 20000
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 20000
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 5 20
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 sipip
#
pbxuser 22223000 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno 22223000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

#
pbxuser 22223001 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno 22223001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
#
afterroute-change 9
callprefix 9
trunk-group at0
caller no-change
called del 7 1
#
afterroute-change 20000
callprefix 20000
trunk-group sipip
caller no-change
called del 7 5
#

# Configuration file of RouterB


voice
voip-address signalling interface Ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.2
voip-address media interface Ethernet 2/0/0 192.168.1.2
#
port fxo 1/0/4
#
enterprise hw
dn-set local
#
sipserver
signalling-address ip 192.168.1.2 port 5060
media-ip 192.168.1.2
register-uri huawei.com
home-domain huawei.com
#
r2 signalling-type argentina
#
r2 signalling-type brazil
#
r2 signalling-type mexico
#
r2 signalling-type standard
#
trunk-group at0 fxo
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
trunk-at0 1/0/4 default-called-telno 33333000 reversepole-detect disable
#
trunk-group sipip sip no-register
enterprise hw dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
signalling-address ip 192.168.1.2 port 5070
media-ip 192.168.1.2
peer-address static 192.168.1.1 5070
register-uri huawei.com
home-domain huawei.com
#
callprefix 9
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 9
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
digit-length 1 15
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 at0
#
callprefix 3333
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 3333
call-type category basic-service attribute 0

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

Huawei AR2200 Series Enterprise Routers


Configuration Guide - Voice

2 PBX Configuration

#
callprefix 20000
enterprise hw dn-set local
prefix 20000
call-type category basic-service attribute 0
destination-location inter-office
callroute trunkgroup1 sipip
#
pbxuser 33333000 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/0
telno 33333000
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
service-right call-transfer enable
#
pbxuser 33333001 pots enterprise hw
port 1/0/1
telno 33333001
dn-set local
call-right in international-toll out international-toll
#
afterroute-change 9
callprefix 9
trunk-group at0
caller no-change
called del 8 1
#
afterroute-change 20000
callprefix
20000
trunk-group at0
caller no-change
called del 8 5
#
return

Issue 01 (2012-04-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

Potrebbero piacerti anche